Quarterlytics / Residential Construction / The Berkeley Group

The Berkeley Group

bkg · LSE
Claim this profile
Ticker bkg
Exchange LSE
Sector
Industry Residential Construction
Employees 1001-5000
← All annual reports
FY2015 Annual Report · The Berkeley Group
Sign in to download
Loading PDF…
Annual Report 2015

About this report
Welcome to the 2015 Annual 
Report of The Berkeley Group 
Holdings plc (“the Berkeley 
Group”, “Berkeley”, “the Group”), 
a publicly owned company, listed 
on the London Stock Exchange 
within the FTSE 250. The Strategic 
Report explains Berkeley’s strategy, 
business model, performance and 
outlook. The Governance Section 
covers the role and activities of the 
Board in running the business and 
their remuneration. The detailed 
Financials, accompanied by a 
report from the Group’s auditors, 
complete the Annual Report.

Cover image: Goodman’s Fields, Aldgate.
Below: One Tower Bridge.

Strategic Report
02  2015 Performance Highlights
06  Chairman’s Statement
07  Managing Director’s Statement
08  Business model
17  What we do
23  How we manage risk 
32  Where we operate 
37   Our plan and commitments for  

the business: ‘Our Vision’
49   Trading and Financial Review  

and Outlook

Governance
58  Board of Directors 
60  Corporate Governance Report 
64  Audit Committee Report 
66  Directors’ Remuneration Report 
84  Directors’ Report

Financials
90   Independent Auditors’ Report
94   Consolidated Income Statement 
94   Consolidated Statement of 
Comprehensive Income
95   Consolidated Statement of  

Financial Position

96   Consolidated Statement of  

Changes in Equity

97   Consolidated Cash Flow Statement
98   Notes to the Consolidated Financial 

Statements

121  Company Balance Sheet
122   Notes to the Company  
Financial Statements

126   Five year summary and definitions
127   Financial Diary
127   Registered Office and Advisors

Proud to be a member of the Berkeley Group of Companies

 
The Berkeley Group

Berkeley builds new homes, neighbourhoods and communities  
for everyone, from families to first time buyers, student  
accommodation to senior living and luxury homes to affordable  
housing, with a focus on quality.

Its business model recognises that Berkeley operates in a cyclical  
property market and that there are significant operational risks in  
identifying, designing, building and selling homes and creating places.

Berkeley mitigates these risks by focusing on development  
in London and the South of England, markets which it  
knows and understands, and forward selling new homes  
wherever possible. In doing this, Berkeley maintains a strong  
balance sheet, keeps financial risk low and carefully allocates  
resources to the right projects at the right time, matching  
supply to demand wherever it can.

READ MORE ONLINE:  
www.berkeleygroup.co.uk/about-berkeley-group

01

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2015  /  STRATEGIC REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIALSBERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2015  /  STRATEGIC REPORT

2015 Performance Highlights

A year of strong growth across all of our  
key performance indicators.

Performance (Financial Key Performance Indicators)

Adjusted profit before tax 

Basic earnings per share

£454.6million

313.0p

2011
2012
2013
2014
2015

£136.2m
£214.8m
£270.7m
£380.0m
£454.6m

72.1p
2011
2012
121.0p
2013
160.0p
2014
221.8p
2015
313.0p
Note: includes proportion of earnings per share paid as dividends per share.

Key Measure 

Result 

Key Measure 

Result 

This is our core measure  
of profitability, our absolute 
return from the sale and 
delivery of new homes in  
the year before the impact  
of profit from the sale of 
ground rent assets.

Adjusted profit before  
tax of £454.6m, an increase  
of 19.6% on last year.

Adjusted profit before tax 
excludes £85.1m of profit from 
the sale of ground rent assets.
The unadjusted profit before 
tax is £539.7m.

This measure of profitability 
allows for total profit after tax 
and takes into account the 
weighted average number of 
shares in issue during the year. 
The dividend per share paid 
in the year is articulated in the 
graph to show earnings cover.

Basic earnings per share is 
313.0 pence, up 91.2 pence 
from last year. 

Adjusted earnings per share, 
which excludes the effect 
of £85.1m of profit from the 
sale of ground rent assets, is 
263.6p (2014: 221.8p).

Adjusted return on equity

Net asset value per share

29.5%

1,199p

2011
2012
2013
2014
2015

15.3%
21.2%
22.4%
27.5%
29.5%

2011
2012
2013
2014
2015

709p
839p
1,009p
1,066p
1,199p

Key Measure 

Result 

Key Measure 

Result 

Calculated as profit before 
tax, excluding profit from the 
sale of ground rent assets as 
a percentage of the average 
of opening and closing 
shareholders’ funds, this 
measure shows the efficiency 
of the returns generated  
from shareholder equity in  
the business.

A result of 29.5%, up from 
27.5% last year, represents a 
strong performance ahead of 
our long-term historic range.

The unadjusted return on 
equity, including profit from 
the sale of ground rent  
assets, was 35.1%.

This balance sheet measure 
reflects the value of 
shareholders’ interests in  
the net assets of the business 
on an historical cost basis.

The growth of 133 pence 
to 1,199 pence per share 
demonstrates value delivered 
to shareholders even after 
allowing for dividend 
payments of 180 pence  
per share.

02

I

S
T
R
A
T
E
G
C
R
E
P
O
R
T

G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

I

F
N
A
N
C
A
L
S

I

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2015  /  STRATEGIC REPORT

Outlook (Financial Key Performance Indicators)

Cash due on forward sales

Gross margin on land holdings

£2,959million

£5,272million

2011
2012
2013
2014
2015

£814m
£1,056m
£1,453m
£2,274m
£2,959m

2014
2015
Note: 2014 and 2015 figures now include legacy pipeline of future land.

£4,514m
£5,272m

Key Measure 

Result 

Key Measure 

Result 

This measures cash due from 
customers during the next 
three financial years under 
unconditional contracts for 
sale, and provides visibility 
over the security of future 
cash flows.

This has risen by £685 million 
to £2,959 million in the year, 
an increase of 30.1 %.

This provides a measure of 
expected value in the Group’s 
existing land holdings in 
the event that the Group 
successfully sells and delivers 
the schemes planned for  
this land. 

This has increased by  
£758 million to £5,272 million 
in the year, a result of further 
value added from planning 
consents, sales secured and 
schemes acquired over and 
above profit recognised in  
the year.

Performance (Non-financial Key Performance Indicators)

Our People

Accident Incident Rate  
per 1,000 employees

2.46(2014: 2.92)

Customers

Net Promoter 
Score

69.8

(2014: not applicable)

Managing health and safety on  
our sites is a priority to protect the  
wellbeing of our staff and contractors.  
This year we have performed within  
our target of 3.25, and the industry 
average of 4.12.

We introduced this independently  
assessed measure of customer satisfaction  
in 2015 that enables comparison to  
companies across all markets and sectors.  
A result of 69.8 ranks us alongside some  
of Britain’s top companies.

Our People

Staff Engaged with the 
Berkeley Foundation

73%

(2014: 64%)

Our aim is for all employees to  
be involved with the Berkeley  
Foundation, providing a positive  
impact on society.

Read more: see pg 46

Read more: see pg 38

Read more: see pg 46

03

 
71 new apartments  
at Ebury Square in 
Belgravia were 
completed this year.

04

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2015  /  STRATEGIC REPORTStrategic Report

05

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2015  /  STRATEGIC REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIALSChairman’s Statement

I believe that Berkeley  
has the right plan in place  
to deliver long-term  
sustainable success.

TONY PIDGLEY CBE  
CHAIRMAN

90p

Per share – interim dividend 
payable in September 2015

£1.7billion

To be returned in cash  
to shareholders by 2021

“I am pleased to announce pre-tax profits 
for the Berkeley Group of £539.7 million 
for the year ended 30 April 2015. This 
result underlines the benefit of operating 
the right strategy consistently through 
the cycle. By maintaining our financial 
discipline Berkeley can apply its unique 
operating model to develop sites which are 
complex and where others may perceive 
that the risk is too great, and in doing so, 
we unlock land for new homes that would 
not otherwise come forward.

Berkeley accepts this additional operational 
risk which is managed carefully and 
intensively to create sustainable added 
value returns.

Berkeley is delivering some 10% of all new 
homes in London and 10% of the Capital’s 
affordable homes across our 74 sites.  
This creates economic value of £1.4 billion 
and sustains some 12,000 jobs. In addition,  
we remain committed to increase site-based 
apprenticeships and training to help address 
the skills shortage which our industry faces.

We are acutely aware of the importance 
to our society of all forms of tenure for 
new housing and welcome the vision of 
Government, the Greater London Authority 
and local councils to increase the number 
of new homes built. For Berkeley it is 
equally important to ensure that we are 
market leaders in terms of the quality of 
the places and homes we create.

We welcome the stability in Central 
Government following the General Election 
and the commitment to increase housing 
supply, but political uncertainty remains 
with the London Mayoral Election and 
referendum on Britain’s relationship with 
Europe on the horizon. Berkeley is a 
supporter of the UK remaining in Europe  
as this is the best way for London to remain  
a world city. There is no doubt, however, 
that for business to thrive, we must not  
be bound by over-regulation, be this from 
our own Government or from Europe.

The Board has declared a further  
interim dividend of 90 pence per share 
(£122.9 million), payable on 17 September 
2015 to shareholders on the register on  
14 August 2015. This will complete the 
first milestone of paying 434 pence per 
share by 30 September 2015. The Board 
considers that the Group is well positioned 
to meet the remaining milestones of  
433 pence by September 2018 and 433 
pence by September 2021.

In closing, I would like to express my thanks 
to my colleagues in Berkeley for their 
dedication and hard work in delivering this 
strong performance. I firmly believe that 
Berkeley has the right plan in place to deliver 
long-term sustainable success, a strategy 
which can adapt to any changes in the 
market to protect the business, in what is a 
cyclical market, and continue to deliver value 
to shareholders and the community alike.”

Tony Pidgley CBE
Chairman

06

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2015  /  STRATEGIC REPORTBERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2015  /  STRATEGIC REPORT

Managing Director’s Statement

Berkeley continues  
to be defined by its  
focus on quality.

ROB PERRINS
MANAGING DIRECTOR

£454.6m

Adjusted profit before  
tax for the year

£5,272m

Estimated gross margin  
in land holdings

“Berkeley has delivered adjusted pre-tax 
earnings of £454.6 million, an increase of 
19.6% on last year from the sale of 3,355 
new homes at an average selling price 
of £575,000, and an additional profit of 
£85.1 million from the sale of a portfolio 
of ground rent assets, giving total pre-tax 
earnings of £539.7 million.

With £3 billion of cash due on forward 
sales over the next three years and stable 
market conditions, Berkeley anticipates 
that adjusted earnings for the current year 
will be at similar levels to 2014/15, and is 
targeting the delivery of pre-tax profits in 
the region of £2.0 billion over the three 
year period comprising 2015/16, 2016/17 
and 2017/18. This profit will be generated 
from our key regeneration sites including 
Riverlight, Chelsea Creek, Goodman’s Fields, 
Battersea Reach, Abell & Cleland, Vista, One 
Tower Bridge, The Corniche, London Dock, 
Kidbrooke Village, Beaufort Park, Royal 
Arsenal Riverside and Woodberry Park.  
By nature, the scale of these schemes 
makes profit delivery in specific periods 
sensitive to timing and we will always 
prioritise quality ahead of individual  
period financial targets. 

We have made great strides with our land 
holdings, acquiring five new sites, securing 
28 planning consents and moving eight new 
sites into production. This has given us the 
certainty to integrate our pipeline sites into 
the land bank, which now comprises some 
37,000 plots with £5.3 billion of estimated 
future gross margin, an increase in the year 
of £0.8 billion. Work continues to bring 
forward the first 10 sites identified for our 
St William joint venture with National Grid. 
Since the year end its first site achieved 
planning for 800 units in Battersea. 

Berkeley continues to be defined by 
its focus on quality. This, alongside 
the Company’s sustained commercial 
performance, is what differentiates the 
brand. It begins with the quality of design 
that we commission, through the quality 
of build and service to the quality of the 
places we create. This strategy underpins 
the offer we make to landowners, local 
authorities and our customers.

We also have robust evidence to 
demonstrate performance in each of these 
areas. Our development at Roman House 
won the top Considerate Constructors Site 
award from a pool of 9,015 sites across the 

UK; Berkeley’s net promoter score, which 
measures customer loyalty, is the highest 
in the property sector; and Berkeley is the 
only public company in Britain to address 
and measure people’s wellbeing in the 
places that we build.

Berkeley continues to invest directly in 
the people and communities connected 
to our sites. We recognise that public 
companies need to play a more proactive, 
more productive role in society since the 
recession. The Berkeley Foundation has so 
far committed £6 million in four key areas, 
of which £1.6 million has so far been raised 
by our staff. Projects like Street Elite are 
helping young adults involved with gangs 
or crime on London estates find a job or 
get into college; thirteen are now directly 
employed with Berkeley itself.

Berkeley has the land, forward sales, balance 
sheet and people to achieve its targets. We 
are well positioned to pay the 433 pence of 
scheduled dividends equally over the period 
to September 2018 and build a successful 
and sustainable business for the long term 
that maximises returns in a cyclical market.”

Rob Perrins
Managing Director 

07

STRATEGIC REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIALSBERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2015  /  STRATEGIC REPORT

Business model

Berkeley builds new homes, neighbourhoods and communities. Its strategy rests  
on five core principles, it has a clear plan to implement this strategy, and  
the results can be seen in the places we create and our shareholder returns.

What we do

Our business is about placemaking 
not just housebuilding, creating  
strong communities where people 
enjoy a great quality of life.

These places range in size from  
a few homes in market towns 
to complex, mixed-use urban 
regeneration schemes of over  
4,000 homes all built with safety, 
sustainability and quality at  
their heart.

Berkeley runs the business with  
the aim of being successful over 
the long-term. 

Read more: see pg 17  
‘What we do’

Strategy
Berkeley’s strategy rests on five  
key principles in two areas

i

s
k
s
i
r
r
u
o
g
n
d
n
a
t
s
r
e
d
n
U

1 :   Cyclical market
We recognise that the property market is  
inherently cyclical.

Read more: see pg 23 ‘How we manage risk’

2 : Operational challenges
We understand that there are significant operational  
risks in successfully identifying, designing, building  
and selling homes and creating new places.

Read more: see pg 23 ‘How we manage risk’

l

e
u
a
v
g
n
i
r
e
v

i
l

e
d
d
n
a
s
k
s
i
r

i

r
u
o
g
n
g
a
n
a
M

3 : Knowing our market
We operate in London and the South of England,  
markets that we know and understand. We believe that 
recognising the importance of relationships and local 
knowledge gives us a competitive advantage and  
enables us to deliver new places which are socially, 
environmentally and economically successful.

Read more: see pg 32 ‘Where we operate’

4 : Sound financials
We aim to keep financial risk low, by maintaining  
a strong balance sheet, forward selling new homes 
where possible, carefully allocating resources  
to the right projects and buying land in the right 
locations at the right time.

Read more: see pg 49 ‘Trading and financial review and outlook’

5 : Autonomy and values 
We have recognised brands and autonomous, talented 
operational teams who carefully manage each individual 
scheme, regardless of size, to a bespoke design, and 
embrace Berkeley’s core values in their approach.

Read more: see pg 23 ‘How we manage risk’

08

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2015  /  STRATEGIC REPORT

Plan
How we embed our 
strategy in the business

Results
The results of what we  
do and how we do it

I

S
T
R
A
T
E
G
C
R
E
P
O
R
T

G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

I

F
N
A
N
C
A
L
S

I

Berkeley’s plan, designed 
to implement this strategy 
and help all of our people 
contribute to the success of 
the business, is embedded in 
the framework of “Our Vision”, 
which articulates a clear set  
of commitments across  
every area of the business.

This framework, and our 
progress in delivering  
against these commitments,  
is explained in more detail  
in the Strategic Report.

We believe that meeting  
our commitments under  
this plan is central to  
how we can generate  
long-term value.

Read more: see pg 37

Shareholder returns
We have a plan to return £13 per share (over 
£1.7 billion) by 2021 and to retain a successful, 
sustainable business thereafter. Our performance 
demonstrates that we are on track to achieve this.

Read more: see pg 49

Homes
We are building new homes to help the country 
meet the housing shortfall and creating places 
characterised by the quality of their design, public 
realm, transport and access to jobs and amenities.

Read more: see pg 10

Jobs
We have created some 12,000 jobs in our offices 
and on our developments and we continue to 
support our supply chain. We have a loyal and 
dedicated workforce.

Read more: see pg 12

Community
We aim to deliver sustainable communities  
which endure long after our work is complete, 
supported by our engagement with local people 
through the Berkeley Foundation which has  
raised over £6 million over the last four years.

Read more: see pg 14

09

 
Homes

Quality and attention to  
detail in all our homes

10

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2015  /  STRATEGIC REPORTResults:Building quality sustainable 
homes for the future
Berkeley has built a total of nearly 

17,000 new homes over the last five 
years, of which over 10,000 have  

been built over the last three.

This year in particular we have delivered 
some exceptional affordable housing 
schemes. These include 180 one, two, three 
and four bedroom homes delivered by  
St James at Chambers Wharf in Southwark, 
designed by Ian Simpson architects, and  
the first new affordable homes delivered  
by Berkeley Homes at One Tower Bridge.

The homes delivered by Berkeley include 
a broad range of tenures including private 
housing, social housing for Registered 
Providers, housing sold to qualifying residents 
under discount schemes agreed with local 
authorities, student accommodation, senior 
living and housing with care. Some 65% 
of the homes that were built by Berkeley 
over the five years to 2014 were sold for less 
than £250,000, below the 5% (previously 
3%) threshold for stamp duty.

Regardless of tenure, we believe in building 
homes of exceptional quality, using 
leading architects to design every scheme 
individually to suit its location and context 
and the right amenities for its setting. We 
treat landscaping as an integral part of each 
development, placing huge significance on 
creating beautiful outside spaces that work  
in harmony with their settings.

We recognise that delivering homes that 
are environmentally sound is right for our 
customers and we led the industry with our 
commitment in 2008 for all new schemes to 
reach Code for Sustainable Homes Level 3. 
Since this time, environmental performance 
of homes has become heavily regulated  
and we are now focusing on connectivity 
and guaranteeing space standards for all 
new homes.

16,900

new homes delivered over  
the last five years

65%

homes sold for less than £250,000 
over the five years to 2014

Main image: Marryat Place, Wimbledon.
Above left: One Tower Bridge  Above right: Woodberry Park, Hackney.

11

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2015  /  STRATEGIC REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIALSJobs

5.6 jobs created for each  
home built by Berkeley

12

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2015  /  STRATEGIC REPORTResults:Creating growth through  
long-term job opportunities
L ast year, Berkeley supported a total of  

21,000 jobs either directly, indirectly 
through its subcontractors and 

The programme is designed to open up 
opportunities to people for whom the job 
market seems closed. Inevitably, many of 
these people need support with the process of 
moving into work. By working with partners 
like Young London Working and Crisis, we  
can ensure that this support is there when it  
is most needed. 

suppliers, or through the induced effects  
of their employees’ expenditure creating jobs  
in the wider economy. This is 5.6 jobs in the  
UK for each home built by Berkeley. In 2014 
we launched a new commitment to increase 
site-based apprenticeships and training.

Amongst the many activities of the Berkeley 
Foundation, its Job Creation Programme, 
now in its second year, helps unemployed 
people to access job opportunities within  
the Berkeley Group and our supply chain.  
It is our response to the employment crisis 
that followed the recession. 

Berkeley has committed to creating 500 jobs 
for unemployed people across the lifetime 
of the programme. They range across 
the property and construction industry, 
from office based roles in administration, 
marketing and customer services, to site 
based roles across the full range of trades. 

21,000

jobs supported by Berkeley and  
its supply chain in 2014

Not everybody in the Job Creation 
Programme comes through this route. 
Operating companies and supply chain 
companies working on Berkeley sites are  
also encouraged to employ formerly 
unemployed people wherever possible. In  
total, 400 unemployed people have moved  
into work in this way since July 2013.

500

jobs being created for  
unemployed people through  
the Berkeley Foundation’s Job 
Creation Programme

Left: Site inspection at Chelsea Creek  Above: Apprentices working for Berkeley and its contractors.

13

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2015  /  STRATEGIC REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIALSCommunity

Berkeley built a brand new primary school in  
Barns Green to replace their old small school

14

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2015  /  STRATEGIC REPORTResults:BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2015  /  STRATEGIC REPORT

We are dedicated to  
creating places that will be 
enjoyed for years to come

Our business is about placemaking, 

not just housebuilding. At Berkeley, 
we recognise that the quality of  
new development has a direct impact on 
people’s wellbeing.

Working with the University of Reading and 
Social Life, the Berkeley Group has created a 
toolkit which helps developers and planners 
apply the idea of social sustainability in 
practice. It does this by measuring people’s 
views about their own wellbeing and their 
experience of living on our developments, 
alongside an assessment of the quality of 
local amenities and infrastructure.

Berkeley uses this framework to measure 
and increase people’s quality of life on all its 
developments of more than 100 homes. It  
uses the toolkit throughout the planning 
process and beyond to consider the issues  
of placekeeping as well as placemaking. 

The toolkit can help our wider stakeholders, 
including planners and decision-makers, by 
helping councils meet the social sustainability 
requirements of the NPPF and to discharge 
responsibilities for improving public health, 
measuring the long-term impact of planning 
and regeneration policies on the wellbeing  
of residents and empowering councillors  
and planning officers to demand more of the 
right things from applicants. 

I

S
T
R
A
T
E
G
C
R
E
P
O
R
T

G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

I

F
N
A
N
C
A
L
S

I

The framework is made up of 13 
criteria covering three themes:

       Social cultural life – what  
1

it’s like to live there

         Voice and influence – how  
2
people affect what goes on

         Amenities and social 
3

infrastructure – the design  
and facilities

R U C T U R E

T

S

A

a

n

T

s

p

r

D

is

CIAL IN F R
Local integration

e c

tin

tiv

c

a

h

o

r

t

l

i

n

k

s

r

a

c

t

e

r

C
o
m
m
u
n

i

t
y

s
p
a
c
e

O
 S
D
N
A
S
E

Street layout

s p a c e

A d a p t a b l e  

I

T

I

N
E

M

A

S

O

C
I

A

L

Links with
neighbours

C

U

L

T

g

e i n

U

R

A

L

W e ll b

Feelings of
safety

L

I

F
E

Community
facilities

y
r
e
v
i
l
e
d
l
a
c
o
L

A

b

i

l

i

ness to act

g

t

y

t

o

i

n

f

u

e

l

Willin
OICE AND IN F L U E N C E

c

e

n

V

71%

of people at Woodberry Down feel 
able to influence local decisions 
compared to an average of 40% 
across Britain

91%

of residents at Kidbrooke Village 
reported feeling like they belong to 
the neighbourhood; across Britain 
only 67% of people feel the same

15

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2015  /  STRATEGIC REPORT

Edenbrook, Fleet.

16

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2015  /  STRATEGIC REPORT

What we do

Our business is about placemaking, not just  
housebuilding; it’s about creating strong communities 
where people enjoy a great quality of life.

Identifying and  
acquiring land

I

S
T
R
A
T
E
G
C
R
E
P
O
R
T

G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

I

F
N
A
N
C
A
L
S

I

Customer 
service and  
stewardship

Making 
the right 
decisions

Designing  
and planning  
new homes  
and places

Marketing and  
selling homes

Building new  
homes and places

17

 
What we do

The places that we create range from a few homes in market towns to complex,  
mixed-use urban regeneration schemes of over 4,000 homes.

Identifying and  
acquiring land

We have invested nearly £2 billion in new land since the  
bottom of the market in 2009 and have formed St William,  
a joint venture with National Grid, to regenerate redundant  
gas works across London and the South of England.

Experience
Our experienced land teams understand 
our focus on investing selectively in the 
right locations in our core markets of 
London and the South of England where 
there is underlying demand for new  
homes, good transport links and the  
scope to create successful new places.

Appraisal
We undertake a rigorous internal appraisal 
process to assess the opportunities 
and risks of potential acquisitions and 
pre-authorise all land offers at Board 
level which enables us to act quickly, 
innovatively and decisively, and deliver  
on our offers.

Entrepreneurship
The Group thrives in adopting an 
entrepreneurial approach in taking on 
complex, challenging, brownfield land 
which others shy away from, but only 
where there are the right commercial 
fundamentals, the potential to add 
value and where we have the vision to 
create something special through the 
development process.

Designing and planning 
new homes and places

We work with consultants, local authorities and  
communities and aim to create places characterised by  
the quality of their design, public realm, sustainability,  
transport links and access to jobs and amenities.

Consultation
We use professional architects and leading 
consultants and engineers to provide 
bespoke designs for every new scheme,  
however large or small, in consultation  
with local communities. With the knowledge 
gained on our other developments, we strive 
to deliver schemes which are of high quality, 
sensitive to their heritage and surroundings 
and meet the aspirations of our customers 
and local and national stakeholders.

Sustainability
We have addressed the challenge of 
understanding what makes a successful 
place by implementing a framework to 
promote quality of life and strength of 
community, which we now apply to our 
schemes. We have led the way in delivering 
environmentally sustainable living on large-
scale developments and continue to lead 
our sector in sustainable development.

Partnerships
We engage closely with our partners in 
the local authorities and communities 
surrounding each of our sites to understand 
stakeholders’ needs and prevailing 
sensitivities and reflect these in our designs. 
We continue to cement our reputation 
for quality and for delivering on our 
promises, and thrive on the strong working 
relationships that we have developed.

18

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2015  /  STRATEGIC REPORT 
Building new  
homes and places

We are employing some 12,000 people in our offices  
and on our schemes under construction, building new  
homes and places for this generation and the next. 

Intensive management
Each of our developments is led by a 
dedicated project team responsible for all 
aspects of detailed design, quality, delivery, 
health and safety, commercial appraisal 
and technical detail. The coordination of 
professional teams of consultants and 
contractors and strong communication 
throughout are critical in ensuring the 
smooth delivery of every project.

Health and safety
We place the utmost importance on the 
health, safety and wellbeing of our people 
and our subcontractor teams on site with 
dedicated health and safety managers 
overseeing all of our developments and 
health and safety matters monitored, 
prioritised and debated at every Board 
meeting in every company within the 
business. We are proud of our record in  
this area but seek continual improvement  
in other methodologies and approach.

Considerate construction
The reputation of Berkeley amongst its 
partners and stakeholders relies on all of our 
project teams engaging with surrounding 
communities, being a responsible and 
considerate neighbour and working with our 
suppliers and contractors to complete our 
schemes on time and budget. We recently won 
the award for most considerate construction 
site in Britain at Roman House. We are signed 
up to the Prompt Payment Code, and aim  
to develop strong, long-term relationships.

Marketing and  
selling homes

Whether first-time buyers, families, experienced  
investors, retailers, our partners in housing associations  
or providers of student accommodation, Berkeley  
strives to ensure that its customers receive an  
unparalleled service when buying from Berkeley.

Customer focus
Sales teams across the business have an 
in-depth knowledge of their developments 
and help our customers find the right 
home to suit their needs. They have the 
knowledge and understanding to explain 
the intricacies of every development,  
from the specification of each new  
home and the technical details to the  
on-site amenities and wider context of  
the scheme.

Meeting demand
We aim to forward sell our homes where 
possible to ensure that what we are 
building reflects what our customers 
want and enables us to provide a range of 
customer choices and a bespoke service 
across all of our developments. Our 
financial strength affords us the flexibility  
to evolve our product to meet our 
customers’ tastes and be flexible in how 
and when we deliver it.

Modern living
We are constantly evolving our design, 
product and features, as well as the wider 
on-site amenities on each scheme, to help 
turn our developments into the homes 
that people expect today. Many of our 
commitments under “Our Vision” reflect 
changing priorities for our customers and 
help keep our homes at the forefront of 
modern living.

19

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2015  /  STRATEGIC REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIALSWhat we do  
continued

Customer service  
and stewardship

Customer satisfaction is the essential measure  
of whether our homes and our service meet the  
aspirations of our customers.

Estate management
Successful places need the right  
long-term management strategy 
and we work closely with appointed 
managing agents to set the right tone 
for our schemes long after they have 
been completed, and are committed 
to investigating and implementing the 
best forms of estate management and 
community governance on our schemes.

Future-proofing
We recognise that technology advances 
rapidly, sometimes more quickly than 
we can build our schemes, and that we 
need to be at the forefront of employing 
new techniques and enabling the latest 
technology to serve our customers. Our 
current commitments under “Our Vision” 
include enabling fibre optic broadband 
cabling in all our new homes.

Customer journey
Dedicated customer relationship managers 
look after every stage of the customer 
journey and provide a level of care and 
service after completion which we expect 
to match the quality of our product 
across all of our schemes. We benchmark 
our performance on customer service 
not just across the sector but against 
the top businesses in the country, and 
look to continually improve our offering 
with features such as My Home Plus, an 
interactive portal for our customers.

Awards

Queen’s Award for Enterprise: 
Sustainable Development 2014

PLC Awards 2014 - Winner -  
Achievement in Sustainability March 2015

Winner - Most Considerate Site - 
Considerate Constructors Scheme 
Awards 2015 (Roman House)

MOST CONSIDERATE SITE

20

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2015  /  STRATEGIC REPORTSeasonal changes at  
Edenbrook in Fleet.

21

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2015  /  STRATEGIC REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIALSBERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2015  /  STRATEGIC REPORT

Our site teams, as in the photo below at 
Goodman’s Fields, Aldgate, understand  
the importance of supporting all our 
employees to enable them to work in  
a safe environment and to continue to 
advance their knowledge and skills.

22

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2015  /  STRATEGIC REPORT

How we manage risk

Risk management is embedded in the organisation.  
We understand that there are significant operational risks 
in successfully identifying, designing, building and  
selling homes and creating new places.

I

S
T
R
A
T
E
G
C
R
E
P
O
R
T

G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

I

F
N
A
N
C
A
L
S

I

23

 
How we manage risk

Carefully managing the risks of each and every site that we  
acquire and develop is at the heart of how we work.

A strategy embedded  
in understanding and  
mitigating risk

These five principles underpin the 
spirit of Berkeley, and are driven by the 
engagement and quality of our people  
and the attention to detail which 
characterises the way we work. This 
anchors our approach to managing  
the specific operational and financial  
risks of the business.

Two of the five principles which  
underpin Berkeley’s strategy represent  
an understanding of the fundamental  
risks that face the company as a  
residential developer:

1

2

We recognise that the property 
market is inherently cyclical.

 We understand that there are 
significant operational risks in 
successfully identifying, designing, 
building and selling homes and 
creating new places.

The remaining three principles represent 
our headline corporate approach to 
managing these macro risks:

3

4

5

We operate in London and the 
South of England, markets that  
we know and understand. We 
believe that recognising the 
importance of relationships 
and local knowledge gives us 
a competitive advantage and 
enables us to deliver new places 
which are socially, environmentally 
and economically successful.

We aim to keep financial risk low, 
by maintaining a strong balance 
sheet, forward selling new homes 
where possible, carefully allocating 
funds to the right projects and 
buying land in the right locations  
at the right time.

We have recognised brands and 
autonomous, talented operational 
teams who carefully manage each 
individual scheme, regardless of 
size, to a bespoke design, and 
embrace Berkeley’s core values 
in their approach.

Day-to-day  
management of 
specific risks

Risk management is embedded in the 
organisation. At operating company and 
divisional level, Board meeting agendas 
are structured around the key specific 
risks facing the Group. Risk management 
is the basis of debate in every operational 
Board meeting on the progress of each 
and every site acquired, developed and 
sold by the Group.

In terms of formal risk reporting, and 
guided by a risk framework identified 
at Main Board level, each division of the 
Group completes a quarterly risk review, 
incorporating Group-wide standard risks 
and any other risks identified as specific  
to their business. These are combined, 
overlaid with corporate risks and  
reported quarterly to the Main Board.

The controls and processes surrounding 
how we assess risk across the Group 
are explained further in the Corporate 
Governance report on page 62.

The principal operating risks and our 
approach to mitigating them are described 
in more detail on pages 26 to 31.

Our approach is anchored in a desire to 
understand each and every risk on all of 
our schemes through careful appraisal of 
new purchases, successfully and effectively 
negotiating the planning process, building 
safely, efficiently, on programme and on 
budget, forward selling where possible and 
providing exceptional customer service.

We create bespoke solutions for each site 
and as such do not produce a standard 
product, which requires experienced, 
intensive management.

24

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2015  /  STRATEGIC REPORTKeeping financial  
risk low

Berkeley keeps financial risk low by 
maintaining a strong balance sheet  
and simplicity and transparency in its  
approach to financing the business.

Exposure to financial risks
The risks to which Berkeley is exposed include:

Liquidity risk
The risk that the funding required for  
the Group to pursue its activities may  
not be available.

Market interest rate risk
The risk that Group financing activities  
are affected by fluctuations in market 
interest rates.

Market credit risk
The risk that counterparties (mainly 
customers) will default on their 
contractual obligations, resulting in a  
loss to the Group. The Group’s exposure 
to credit risk is comprised of cash  
and cash equivalents and trade and  
other receivables.

Other financial risks
Berkeley contracts all of its sales and the 
vast majority of its purchases in sterling, 
and so has no significant exposure to 
currency risk, but does recognise that 
its credit risk includes receivables from 
customers in a range of jurisdictions 
who are themselves exposed to 
currency risk in contracting in sterling.

Management of financial risks
Berkeley adopts a prudent approach to 
managing these financial risks. 

–  Treasury policy and central overview 

–  Forward sales 

 The Board approves treasury policy and 
senior management control day-to-day 
operations. Relationships with banks 
and cash management are coordinated 
centrally at Berkeley’s head office. The 
treasury policy is intended to maintain 
an appropriate capital structure to 
manage the financial risks identified 
and provide the right platform for the 
business to manage its operating risks.

–  Ungeared 

 The Group is currently financing its 
operations through shareholder equity, 
supported by over £430 million of net 
cash on the balance sheet, and so has 
adopted a prudent approach to gearing 
the business and in turn mitigated its 
current exposure to interest rate risk.

–  Headroom provided by bank facilities 
 The Group refinanced its borrowing 
facilities in the year, and now has 
£575 million of committed undrawn 
credit facilities maturing in 2020. 
This refinancing increased Berkeley’s 
revolving credit facilities by £50 million, 
extended the maturity date by two 
years to give five clear years to maturity 
and reduced costs across the life of 
the facility. This refinancing cemented 
Berkeley’s strong working partnership 
with the six banks which provide the 
facilities and are listed on page 127  
and is key to Berkeley’s approach to 
mitigating liquidity risk.

 Berkeley’s approach to forward selling 
new homes to customers provides  
good visibility over future cash flows,  
as expressed in cash due on forward 
sales which stands at £2,959 million 
at 30 April 2015. It also helps mitigate 
market credit risk by virtue of 
customers’ deposits held from the point 
of unconditional exchange of contracts 
with customers. These deposits stood 
at £920.9 million at 30 April 2015 and 
provide security for Berkeley in the  
event of customer default at the point  
of completion of sales.

–   Land holdings 

By investing in land at the right point in 
the cycle, holding a clear development 
pipeline in our land holdings and 
continually reviewing our existing 
holdings, we are not under pressure to 
buy new land when it would be wrong 
for long-term success of the business.  

–   Detailed appraisal of spending 

commitments 
A culture which prioritises an 
understanding of the impact of all 
decisions on the Group’s spending 
commitments and hence its balance 
sheet, alongside weekly and monthly 
reviews of cash flow forecasts at 
operating company, divisional and 
Group levels, recognises that ‘cash 
is king’ and central to the continued 
success of Berkeley. 

25

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2015  /  STRATEGIC REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIALS 
 
 
 
 
How we manage risk
continued

We carefully manage each of the key operating risks of our business to drive performance.

Risk Description   

Approach to mitigating risk   

Impact and measurement   

Economic 
conditions

Regulation

As a property developer operating 
within the wider housing market, 
Berkeley’s business is sensitive to 
economic factors such as changes  
in interest rates, employment levels 
and general consumer confidence. 
Some customers are also sensitive  
to changes in the sterling exchange 
rate in terms of their buying decisions 
or ability to meet their obligations 
under contracts.

Changes to economic conditions in the 
UK, Europe and worldwide may lead 
to a reduction in demand for housing 
which could impact on the Group’s 
ability to deliver its corporate strategy.

Adverse changes to Government 
policy on areas such as taxation, 
housing and the environment could 
restrict the ability of the Group to 
deliver its strategy.

Failure to comply with laws  
and regulations could expose 
the Group to penalties and 
reputational damage.

Land 
availability

An inability to source suitable land to 
maintain the Group’s land holdings 
at appropriate margins in a highly 
competitive market could impact  
on the Group’s ability to deliver its 
corporate strategy.

Funds are carefully targeted at investing only in land  
which is underpinned by demand fundamentals and  
a solid viability case even when markets are uncertain.

Levels of committed expenditure are carefully monitored 
against forward sales secured, cash levels and headroom 
against our available bank facilities, with the objective of 
keeping financial risk low to mitigate the operating risks of 
delivery in uncertain markets.

The business is committed to operating at an optimal 
size, with a strong balance sheet, through autonomous 
businesses to maintain the flexibility to react swiftly, when 
necessary, to changes in market conditions.

The effects of changes to Government policies at all  
levels are closely monitored by operating businesses and 
the Board, and representations made to policy-setters 
where appropriate.

Berkeley’s experienced teams are well placed to interpret 
and implement new regulations at the appropriate time 
through direct lines of communication across the Group, 
with support from internal and external legal advisors.

Detailed policies and procedures are in place where 
appropriate to the prevailing regulations and these  
are communicated to all staff.

Land acquisition is focused on Berkeley’s core markets 
of London and the South of England, markets which 
it understands and where it believes that the demand 
fundamentals are strong and hence it stands the best 
chance of securing a viable planning consent.

Berkeley acquires land opportunistically, where it meets  
its internal criteria for purchase, and considers joint 
ventures in particular as a vehicle to work with the right 
partners who bring good quality land complemented  
by Berkeley’s expertise.

Each land acquisition is subject to a formal internal appraisal 
and approval process prior to the submission of a bid and 
again prior to exchange of contracts to give the Group the 
best chance to secure targeted land.

The Group maintains its land holdings to mitigate against 
significant impacts from market changes or delayed build 
activity. Berkeley has experienced land teams with strong 
market knowledge in their areas of focus.

Key:   
Identifying and acquiring land        Designing and planning new homes and places        Building new homes and places 
Marketing and selling new homes        Customer service and stewardship

26

Recognition that Berkeley operates in a cyclical market 

is central to our strategy as articulated within our  

business model.

Maintaining sound financials through a strong balance sheet  

and measuring the commitment of expenditure against  

2015 Performance highlights (KPIs) 

forward sales are also central to our business model. This is what 

(page 02)

protects us against adverse changes in economic conditions.

Read more

Business model  

(page 08)

- Cyclical market

- Sound financials

- Net asset value per share

- Adjusted profit before tax

- Basic earnings per share

- Adjusted return on equity

The strength of the balance sheet is measured by  

monitoring our KPIs, principally net asset value per share,  

the profitability of the business through profit before tax  

and basic earnings per share, and the efficiency of the  

balance sheet through return on equity.

Berkeley is focused geographically on London and the South 

of England, which limits our risk when understanding and 

determining the impact of new regulation across multiple 

locations and jurisdictions.

Business model  

(page 08)

- Knowing our market

- Autonomy and values

We have talented operational teams with an appropriate  

support structure which enables them to act autonomously  

and in the best interests of the business in the long-term.  

The business is therefore well placed with the right people  

to assess the impact of changes in regulations and to  

implement them accordingly.

Understanding the markets in which we operate is central 

to Berkeley’s strategy and gives us the confidence to buy 

land without an implementable planning consent where we 

- Knowing our market

understand what local stakeholders want.

Business model  

(page 08)

- Sound financials

Keeping strong financials gives us the liquidity and flexibility 

to remain competitive when bidding for new land and gives 

vendors the confidence that Berkeley will deliver on any deals 

negotiated, and has enabled us to partner with National Grid  

on St William to bring in more land.

We carefully monitor the level of estimated future gross margin 

in our land holdings as a key performance indicator. This reflects 

the future potential of the business from current land holdings 

valued at current prices and current costs.

Over the last five years, the Group has had stated targets to 

invest in land. Accordingly the growth of estimated gross margin 

in our land holdings has been a key performance target for 

remuneration of Executive Main Board directors as explained  

in the Remuneration Report.

2015 Performance highlights (KPIs) 

(page 03)

- Gross margin on land holdings

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2015  /  STRATEGIC REPORTRisk Description   

Approach to mitigating risk   

Impact and measurement   

Economic 

conditions

As a property developer operating 

Funds are carefully targeted at investing only in land  

within the wider housing market, 

which is underpinned by demand fundamentals and  

Berkeley’s business is sensitive to 

a solid viability case even when markets are uncertain.

or ability to meet their obligations 

The business is committed to operating at an optimal 

economic factors such as changes  

in interest rates, employment levels 

and general consumer confidence. 

Some customers are also sensitive  

to changes in the sterling exchange 

rate in terms of their buying decisions 

under contracts.

Changes to economic conditions in the 

UK, Europe and worldwide may lead 

to a reduction in demand for housing 

which could impact on the Group’s 

ability to deliver its corporate strategy.

Levels of committed expenditure are carefully monitored 

against forward sales secured, cash levels and headroom 

against our available bank facilities, with the objective of 

keeping financial risk low to mitigate the operating risks of 

delivery in uncertain markets.

size, with a strong balance sheet, through autonomous 

businesses to maintain the flexibility to react swiftly, when 

necessary, to changes in market conditions.

Recognition that Berkeley operates in a cyclical market 
is central to our strategy as articulated within our  
business model.

Maintaining sound financials through a strong balance sheet  
and measuring the commitment of expenditure against  
forward sales are also central to our business model. This is what 
protects us against adverse changes in economic conditions.

The strength of the balance sheet is measured by  
monitoring our KPIs, principally net asset value per share,  
the profitability of the business through profit before tax  
and basic earnings per share, and the efficiency of the  
balance sheet through return on equity.

Read more

Business model  
(page 08)
- Cyclical market
- Sound financials

2015 Performance highlights (KPIs) 
(page 02)
- Net asset value per share
- Adjusted profit before tax
- Basic earnings per share
- Adjusted return on equity

GDP growth, a 
decisive General 
Election result and 
London’s continuing 
attractiveness are 
balanced by ongoing 
Eurozone uncertainty.

Regulation

Adverse changes to Government 

The effects of changes to Government policies at all  

policy on areas such as taxation, 

levels are closely monitored by operating businesses and 

housing and the environment could 

the Board, and representations made to policy-setters 

restrict the ability of the Group to 

where appropriate.

Berkeley is focused geographically on London and the South 
of England, which limits our risk when understanding and 
determining the impact of new regulation across multiple 
locations and jurisdictions.

Business model  
(page 08)
- Knowing our market
- Autonomy and values

deliver its strategy.

Failure to comply with laws  

and regulations could expose 

the Group to penalties and 

reputational damage.

Berkeley’s experienced teams are well placed to interpret 

and implement new regulations at the appropriate time 

through direct lines of communication across the Group, 

with support from internal and external legal advisors.

Detailed policies and procedures are in place where 

appropriate to the prevailing regulations and these  

are communicated to all staff.

We have talented operational teams with an appropriate  
support structure which enables them to act autonomously  
and in the best interests of the business in the long-term.  
The business is therefore well placed with the right people  
to assess the impact of changes in regulations and to  
implement them accordingly.

Land 

availability

An inability to source suitable land to 

Land acquisition is focused on Berkeley’s core markets 

maintain the Group’s land holdings 

of London and the South of England, markets which 

at appropriate margins in a highly 

it understands and where it believes that the demand 

competitive market could impact  

fundamentals are strong and hence it stands the best 

on the Group’s ability to deliver its 

chance of securing a viable planning consent.

corporate strategy.

Berkeley acquires land opportunistically, where it meets  

its internal criteria for purchase, and considers joint 

ventures in particular as a vehicle to work with the right 

partners who bring good quality land complemented  

by Berkeley’s expertise.

Each land acquisition is subject to a formal internal appraisal 

and approval process prior to the submission of a bid and 

again prior to exchange of contracts to give the Group the 

best chance to secure targeted land.

The Group maintains its land holdings to mitigate against 

significant impacts from market changes or delayed build 

activity. Berkeley has experienced land teams with strong 

market knowledge in their areas of focus.

Understanding the markets in which we operate is central 
to Berkeley’s strategy and gives us the confidence to buy 
land without an implementable planning consent where we 
understand what local stakeholders want.

Business model  
(page 08)
- Knowing our market
- Sound financials

2015 Performance highlights (KPIs) 
(page 03)
- Gross margin on land holdings

Keeping strong financials gives us the liquidity and flexibility 
to remain competitive when bidding for new land and gives 
vendors the confidence that Berkeley will deliver on any deals 
negotiated, and has enabled us to partner with National Grid  
on St William to bring in more land.

We carefully monitor the level of estimated future gross margin 
in our land holdings as a key performance indicator. This reflects 
the future potential of the business from current land holdings 
valued at current prices and current costs.

Over the last five years, the Group has had stated targets to 
invest in land. Accordingly the growth of estimated gross margin 
in our land holdings has been a key performance target for 
remuneration of Executive Main Board directors as explained  
in the Remuneration Report.

Regulatory changes, 
whether legal, planning 
or tax-related, are a 
continuing challenge.

Accessing good quality 
land is a core inherent 
risk of the business that 
we steadily manage  
in a cyclical market.  
In a competitive 
market with new 
entrants from the UK 
and overseas, the risks 
on new land have 
heightened this year. 

27

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2015  /  STRATEGIC REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIALSHow we manage risk
continued

Risk Description   

Approach to mitigating risk   

Impact and measurement   

Read more

Planning 
process

Delays or refusals in obtaining 
commercially viable planning 
permissions on the Group’s land 
holdings could result in the Group 
being unable to develop the land it 
has purchased.

This could have a direct impact on  
the Group’s ability to deliver its 
product and on its profitability.

Retaining 
people

An inability to attract, develop, 
motivate and retain talented 
employees could have an impact  
on the Group’s ability to deliver  
its strategic priorities.

Failure to consider the retention  
and succession of key management 
could result in a loss of knowledge 
and competitive advantage.

Securing 
sales

An inability to match supply to 
demand in terms of product, location 
and price could result in missed 
sales targets and / or high levels of 
completed stock which in turn could 
impact on the Group’s ability to 
deliver its corporate strategy.

The Group follows a principle of investing in markets that it 
knows and understands, and is geographically focused on 
London and the South of England, which we believe gives 
us the best chance of conceiving and delivering the right 
consents for the land that we acquire.

Full detailed planning and risk assessments are performed 
and monitored for each site without planning permission, 
both before and after purchase. Some sites are acquired 
conditionally and some unconditionally depending on our 
assessment of the risk profile. The planning status of all 
sites is reviewed at monthly divisional Board meetings and 
Main Board meetings.

The Group works closely with local communities in 
respect of planning proposals and strong relationships are 
maintained with local authorities and planning officers.

We have developed a series of commitments within Our 
Vision, our plan for the business, to ensure that we retain 
and develop the best people to support the business  
in the long-term. 

Succession planning is regularly reviewed at both divisional 
and Main Board level. Close relationships and dialogue are 
maintained with key personnel.

Remuneration packages are constantly benchmarked 
against the industry to ensure they remain competitive. 

We want our people to be engaged with the business and 
its impact on wider society through the activities of the 
Berkeley Foundation.

Detailed market demand assessments of each site are 
undertaken before acquisition and regularly during delivery 
of each scheme to ensure that supply is matched to demand 
in each location.

Design, product type and product quality are all assessed 
on a site-by-site basis to ensure that they meet the target 
market and customer aspirations in that location. The Group 
has a diverse range of developments with homes available at 
a broad range of property prices to appeal to a wide market. 
Forward sales are used to take the risk out of the development 
cycle where possible, thereby justifying and underpinning the 
financial investment in each of the Group’s sites. Completed 
stock levels are reviewed and debated regularly.

Mortgage 
availability

Mortgage providers were negatively 
impacted by the financial crisis from 
2008 to 2011, and this reduced their 
ability to provide mortgages to 
potential purchasers at the time.

An inability of customers to secure 
sufficient mortgage finance now or in 
the future could have a direct impact 
on the Group’s transaction levels.

Berkeley has a broad product mix and customer base 
which reduces the reliance on mortgage availability across 
its portfolio.

The Group participates in the Government’s Help to Buy 
scheme, which provides deposit assistance to first time 
buyers, and has participated in other Government schemes 
historically. Deposits are taken on all sales to mitigate the 
financial impact on the Group in the event that sales do not 
complete due to a lack of mortgage availability.

Key:   
Identifying and acquiring land        Designing and planning new homes and places        Building new homes and places 
Marketing and selling new homes        Customer service and stewardship

28

The geographical focus on London and the South of 

England is central to our strategy as articulated within our 

business model.

By maintaining a strong balance sheet, and through a  

long-established reputation for delivery, our stakeholders  

in local communities trust our ability to deliver against any 

commitments that we make, whether financial or operational.

We believe that our commitments in the areas of customer 

service, design, the quality of new homes and placemaking  

can make us the developer of choice for local authorities which  

will help deliver the right planning consents for our schemes. 

This has led to us securing further new consents this year to 

support the future business.

Business model  

(page 08)

- Knowing our market

- Sound financials

Our Vision

- Customers (Page 38)

- Homes (Page 40)

- Places (Page 42)

Remuneration packages are designed with retention in  

2015 Performance highlights (KPIs) 

mind and are explained in the financial statements within  

(pages 02 to 03)

the Financials section of this report and accounted for in  

- Adjusted profit before tax

accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards. 

- Basic earnings per share

Hence they are appropriately reflected in our profit-related key  

-  Staff engaged with the  

performance indicators and senior management across the 

Berkeley Foundation

business has remained stable.

Berkeley’s commitments in the area of people are articulated 

within the Our Vision section of this report. We measure the 

engagement of our people with the Berkeley Foundation as 

representative of their engagement with the business and its 

wider impact.

Our Vision

- Our People (Page 46)

The level of cash due on forward sales secured is a key 

performance indicator which measures the cash which  

2015 Performance highlights (KPIs) 

(pages 02 to 03)

Berkeley expects to receive on contracted forward sales  

- Cash due on forward sales

over the next three financial years. This is a function  

- Net promoter score

of reservation levels compared to trading reported in the  

income statement, and so provides both a good indication  

Our Vision

of past sales performance and visibility over future  

- Customers (Page 38)

cash flows.

Through our commitments to Customers in Our Vision,  

we have put customer service, interaction with our purchasers  

and a commitment to market schemes in the UK first at  

the centre of our plan for the business. We recognise this by 

measuring our performance through the Net Promotor score.

The financial measure of cash due on forward sales  

2015 Performance highlights (KPIs) 

provides an indication of the level of sales on which deposits 

(page 03)

have been taken and hence hedges against the risk of  

- Cash due on forward sales

non-completion of sales.

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2015  /  STRATEGIC REPORTPlanning 

process

Delays or refusals in obtaining 

commercially viable planning 

The Group follows a principle of investing in markets that it 

knows and understands, and is geographically focused on 

permissions on the Group’s land 

London and the South of England, which we believe gives 

holdings could result in the Group 

us the best chance of conceiving and delivering the right 

being unable to develop the land it 

consents for the land that we acquire.

has purchased.

Full detailed planning and risk assessments are performed 

This could have a direct impact on  

and monitored for each site without planning permission, 

the Group’s ability to deliver its 

product and on its profitability.

both before and after purchase. Some sites are acquired 

conditionally and some unconditionally depending on our 

assessment of the risk profile. The planning status of all 

sites is reviewed at monthly divisional Board meetings and 

Main Board meetings.

The Group works closely with local communities in 

respect of planning proposals and strong relationships are 

maintained with local authorities and planning officers.

Retaining 

people

An inability to attract, develop, 

motivate and retain talented 

We have developed a series of commitments within Our 

Vision, our plan for the business, to ensure that we retain 

employees could have an impact  

and develop the best people to support the business  

on the Group’s ability to deliver  

in the long-term. 

its strategic priorities.

Succession planning is regularly reviewed at both divisional 

Failure to consider the retention  

and Main Board level. Close relationships and dialogue are 

and succession of key management 

maintained with key personnel.

could result in a loss of knowledge 

and competitive advantage.

Remuneration packages are constantly benchmarked 

against the industry to ensure they remain competitive. 

We want our people to be engaged with the business and 

its impact on wider society through the activities of the 

Berkeley Foundation.

Securing 

sales

An inability to match supply to 

Detailed market demand assessments of each site are 

demand in terms of product, location 

undertaken before acquisition and regularly during delivery 

and price could result in missed 

of each scheme to ensure that supply is matched to demand 

sales targets and / or high levels of 

in each location.

completed stock which in turn could 

impact on the Group’s ability to 

deliver its corporate strategy.

Design, product type and product quality are all assessed 

on a site-by-site basis to ensure that they meet the target 

market and customer aspirations in that location. The Group 

has a diverse range of developments with homes available at 

a broad range of property prices to appeal to a wide market. 

Forward sales are used to take the risk out of the development 

cycle where possible, thereby justifying and underpinning the 

financial investment in each of the Group’s sites. Completed 

stock levels are reviewed and debated regularly.

Mortgage 

availability

Mortgage providers were negatively 

Berkeley has a broad product mix and customer base 

impacted by the financial crisis from 

which reduces the reliance on mortgage availability across 

2008 to 2011, and this reduced their 

its portfolio.

ability to provide mortgages to 

potential purchasers at the time.

The Group participates in the Government’s Help to Buy 

scheme, which provides deposit assistance to first time 

An inability of customers to secure 

buyers, and has participated in other Government schemes 

sufficient mortgage finance now or in 

historically. Deposits are taken on all sales to mitigate the 

the future could have a direct impact 

financial impact on the Group in the event that sales do not 

on the Group’s transaction levels.

complete due to a lack of mortgage availability.

Risk Description   

Approach to mitigating risk   

Impact and measurement   

Read more

The geographical focus on London and the South of 
England is central to our strategy as articulated within our 
business model.

By maintaining a strong balance sheet, and through a  
long-established reputation for delivery, our stakeholders  
in local communities trust our ability to deliver against any 
commitments that we make, whether financial or operational.

We believe that our commitments in the areas of customer 
service, design, the quality of new homes and placemaking  
can make us the developer of choice for local authorities which  
will help deliver the right planning consents for our schemes. 
This has led to us securing further new consents this year to 
support the future business.

Business model  
(page 08)
- Knowing our market
- Sound financials

Our Vision
- Customers (Page 38)
- Homes (Page 40)
- Places (Page 42)

The planning process  
is complex but has 
been stable this  
year, and so the risk 
profile is steady.

Remuneration packages are designed with retention in  
mind and are explained in the financial statements within  
the Financials section of this report and accounted for in  
accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards. 
Hence they are appropriately reflected in our profit-related key  
performance indicators and senior management across the 
business has remained stable.

Berkeley’s commitments in the area of people are articulated 
within the Our Vision section of this report. We measure the 
engagement of our people with the Berkeley Foundation as 
representative of their engagement with the business and its 
wider impact.

The level of cash due on forward sales secured is a key 
performance indicator which measures the cash which  
Berkeley expects to receive on contracted forward sales  
over the next three financial years. This is a function  
of reservation levels compared to trading reported in the  
income statement, and so provides both a good indication  
of past sales performance and visibility over future  
cash flows.

Through our commitments to Customers in Our Vision,  
we have put customer service, interaction with our purchasers  
and a commitment to market schemes in the UK first at  
the centre of our plan for the business. We recognise this by 
measuring our performance through the Net Promotor score.

2015 Performance highlights (KPIs) 
(pages 02 to 03)
- Adjusted profit before tax
- Basic earnings per share
-  Staff engaged with the  
Berkeley Foundation

Our Vision
- Our People (Page 46)

A stable senior team 
has continued to 
manage the normal 
pressures of people 
retention.

2015 Performance highlights (KPIs) 
(pages 02 to 03)
- Cash due on forward sales
- Net promoter score

Our Vision
- Customers (Page 38)

The financial measure of cash due on forward sales  
provides an indication of the level of sales on which deposits 
have been taken and hence hedges against the risk of  
non-completion of sales.

2015 Performance highlights (KPIs) 
(page 03)
- Cash due on forward sales

29

Whilst sales have 
reduced since last  
year, our experience  
is of a return to a  
normal market.

Low interest rates, 
combined with a return 
to economic growth, 
have supported mortgage 
availability, which has 
reduced this risk this year.

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2015  /  STRATEGIC REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIALSHow we manage risk
continued

Risk Description   

Approach to mitigating risk   

Impact and measurement   

Read more

Environmental 
and social 
sustainability

Health  
and Safety

Build cost & 
programme

Berkeley is aware of the 
environmental and social impact of 
the homes and communities that it 
builds, both during the construction 
phase and on occupation by its 
customers.

Failure to address sustainability 
issues could affect the Group’s 
ability to acquire land, gain planning 
permission, manage sites effectively 
and respond to increasing customer 
demand for sustainable homes.

Berkeley’s operations have a direct 
impact on the health and safety of its 
people, contractors and members of 
the public. Berkeley considers this to 
be an area of critical importance.

A lack of adequate procedures and 
systems to reduce the dangers 
inherent in the construction process 
increases the risk of accidents or 
site-related catastrophes, including 
fire and flood, which could result in 
serious injury or loss of life leading 
to reputational damage, financial 
penalties and disruption to operations.

Build costs are affected by the 
availability of skilled labour and the 
price and availability of materials, 
supplies and subcontractors.

Changes to these prices and the 
availability of labour could impact on 
the profitability of each scheme.

Berkeley’s plan for the business, Our Vision, includes 
specific commitments to enhance environmental and social 
sustainability considerations in the delivery of our schemes. 
On social sustainability in particular, we have sought to lead 
the agenda.

These complement existing practices within the Group 
to focus on brownfield development, monitor carbon 
emissions and to be a considerate contractor on all of our 
schemes and welcomed in the communities within which 
we operate. 

Berkeley’s health and safety strategy is set by the Board. 
Dedicated health and safety teams are in place in each 
division and at Head Office.

Procedures, training and reporting are all regularly 
reviewed to ensure that high standards are maintained and 
comprehensive accident investigation procedures are in 
place. Adequate insurance is held to cover the risks inherent 
in large-scale construction projects.

The Group has implemented a number of initiatives 
to improve health and safety standards on site, with 
workshops held with contractors during the year.

A procurement and programming strategy for each 
development is agreed by the divisional Board before site 
acquisition.

A further assessment of procurement and programming is 
undertaken and agreed by the divisional Board prior to the 
commencement of construction.

Build cost reconciliations and build programme dates are 
presented and reviewed in detail at divisional cost review 
meetings each month.

Berkeley’s commitments within Our Vision, under the headings 

Our Vision

of Homes and Places, focus on the long-term sustainability of 

- Homes (Page 40)

our schemes, including ensuring minimum space standards and 

- Places (Page 42)

putting fibre broadband into all new schemes, carrying out  

- Operations (Page 44)

social sustainability assessments across our developments  

and adapting all developments to climate change through 

measures on flooding, overheating and water shortage. Our  

plan recognises that these are essential considerations to 

support the long-term viability of the places that we create.

Our success in this field is demonstrated by our ranking as  

the most sustainable housebuilder in the UK for the ninth year  

in a row in the Next Generation Benchmark 2014.

We continue to monitor RIDDOR reportable Accident  

Incident Rates, reported within the Our People section  

of Our Vision, and promote continual health and safety 

programmes across the business.

Berkeley’s commitments within Our Vision, under the 

Operations heading, includes the launch of a £2 million 

Innovation Fund to support innovation in health and safety.  

This was successfully launched during 2015 and aims to  

promote further modernisation of the industry from within  

and outside the business whether staff, contractors,  

students or entrepreneurs.

Our Vision

- Operations (Page 44)

- Our People (Page 46)

2015 Performance highlights (KPIs) 

(page 03)

- Accident Incident Rate

Delivering new homes to customers on time and on budget  

2015 Performance highlights (KPIs) 

are crucial to meeting our profit targets, as measured by  

our profit-related key performance indicators. 

Control of capital, whilst embracing the sector-leading 

commitments in Our Vision, in particular under the  

Operations heading, is essential to promoting the long-term 

success of the business and delivering planned returns to 

shareholders by 2021.

(pages 02 to 03)

- Adjusted profit before tax

- Basic earnings per share

- Adjusted return on equity

Our Vision

- Operations (Page 44)

Product 
quality

Berkeley has a reputation for high 
standards of quality in its product.  
If the Group fails to deliver against 
these standards and its wider 
development obligations, it could  
be exposed to reputational damage, 
as well as reduced sales and  
increased cost.

Detailed reviews are undertaken of the product on each 
scheme both during the acquisition of the site and 
throughout the build process to ensure that the quality  
of the product is maintained.

Customer Satisfaction surveys are undertaken on  
the handover of all private apartments, and feedback 
incorporated in shaping the specification and quality  
of subsequent schemes.

The Group monitors its development obligations and 
recognises any associated liabilities which arise.

We believe that delivering a quality product in great places 

2015 Performance highlights (KPIs) 

drives long-term profitability through the planning consents  

(pages 02 to 03)

that we can secure, demand for the product and 

recommendations from our customers.

Commitments under the Homes and Places headings of  

Our Vision demonstrate Berkeley’s targets for continual 

improvement of the product that we deliver, and under the 

Customers heading to gain assurance, especially in the area  

of customer service, that the product delivers the right 

experience for our customers.

- Adjusted profit before tax

- Basic earnings per share

- Adjusted return on equity

- Net promoter score

Our Vision

- Homes (Page 40)

- Places (Page 42)

Key:   
Identifying and acquiring land        Designing and planning new homes and places        Building new homes and places 
Marketing and selling new homes        Customer service and stewardship

30

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2015  /  STRATEGIC REPORTEnvironmental 

and social 

sustainability

Berkeley is aware of the 

Berkeley’s plan for the business, Our Vision, includes 

environmental and social impact of 

specific commitments to enhance environmental and social 

the homes and communities that it 

sustainability considerations in the delivery of our schemes. 

builds, both during the construction 

On social sustainability in particular, we have sought to lead 

phase and on occupation by its 

the agenda.

customers.

Failure to address sustainability 

issues could affect the Group’s 

These complement existing practices within the Group 

to focus on brownfield development, monitor carbon 

emissions and to be a considerate contractor on all of our 

ability to acquire land, gain planning 

schemes and welcomed in the communities within which 

permission, manage sites effectively 

we operate. 

and respond to increasing customer 

demand for sustainable homes.

Health  

and Safety

Berkeley’s operations have a direct 

Berkeley’s health and safety strategy is set by the Board. 

impact on the health and safety of its 

Dedicated health and safety teams are in place in each 

people, contractors and members of 

division and at Head Office.

the public. Berkeley considers this to 

be an area of critical importance.

Procedures, training and reporting are all regularly 

reviewed to ensure that high standards are maintained and 

A lack of adequate procedures and 

comprehensive accident investigation procedures are in 

systems to reduce the dangers 

place. Adequate insurance is held to cover the risks inherent 

inherent in the construction process 

in large-scale construction projects.

increases the risk of accidents or 

site-related catastrophes, including 

fire and flood, which could result in 

serious injury or loss of life leading 

to reputational damage, financial 

penalties and disruption to operations.

The Group has implemented a number of initiatives 

to improve health and safety standards on site, with 

workshops held with contractors during the year.

Build cost & 

programme

Build costs are affected by the 

A procurement and programming strategy for each 

availability of skilled labour and the 

development is agreed by the divisional Board before site 

price and availability of materials, 

acquisition.

supplies and subcontractors.

Changes to these prices and the 

undertaken and agreed by the divisional Board prior to the 

availability of labour could impact on 

commencement of construction.

A further assessment of procurement and programming is 

the profitability of each scheme.

Build cost reconciliations and build programme dates are 

presented and reviewed in detail at divisional cost review 

meetings each month.

Risk Description   

Approach to mitigating risk   

Impact and measurement   

Read more

Berkeley’s commitments within Our Vision, under the headings 
of Homes and Places, focus on the long-term sustainability of 
our schemes, including ensuring minimum space standards and 
putting fibre broadband into all new schemes, carrying out  
social sustainability assessments across our developments  
and adapting all developments to climate change through 
measures on flooding, overheating and water shortage. Our  
plan recognises that these are essential considerations to 
support the long-term viability of the places that we create.

Our success in this field is demonstrated by our ranking as  
the most sustainable housebuilder in the UK for the ninth year  
in a row in the Next Generation Benchmark 2014.

We continue to monitor RIDDOR reportable Accident  
Incident Rates, reported within the Our People section  
of Our Vision, and promote continual health and safety 
programmes across the business.

Berkeley’s commitments within Our Vision, under the 
Operations heading, includes the launch of a £2 million 
Innovation Fund to support innovation in health and safety.  
This was successfully launched during 2015 and aims to  
promote further modernisation of the industry from within  
and outside the business whether staff, contractors,  
students or entrepreneurs.

Our Vision
- Homes (Page 40)
- Places (Page 42)
- Operations (Page 44)

Our focus on this 
area remains a key 
differentiator of 
Berkeley and the risks 
and our approach 
continually evolve.

Our Vision
- Operations (Page 44)
- Our People (Page 46)

2015 Performance highlights (KPIs) 
(page 03)
- Accident Incident Rate

This has been and 
remains an operational 
priority for Berkeley.

Delivering new homes to customers on time and on budget  
are crucial to meeting our profit targets, as measured by  
our profit-related key performance indicators. 

Control of capital, whilst embracing the sector-leading 
commitments in Our Vision, in particular under the  
Operations heading, is essential to promoting the long-term 
success of the business and delivering planned returns to 
shareholders by 2021.

2015 Performance highlights (KPIs) 
(pages 02 to 03)
- Adjusted profit before tax
- Basic earnings per share
- Adjusted return on equity

Our Vision
- Operations (Page 44)

Product 

quality

Berkeley has a reputation for high 

Detailed reviews are undertaken of the product on each 

standards of quality in its product.  

scheme both during the acquisition of the site and 

If the Group fails to deliver against 

throughout the build process to ensure that the quality  

these standards and its wider 

of the product is maintained.

development obligations, it could  

be exposed to reputational damage, 

as well as reduced sales and  

increased cost.

Customer Satisfaction surveys are undertaken on  

the handover of all private apartments, and feedback 

incorporated in shaping the specification and quality  

of subsequent schemes.

The Group monitors its development obligations and 

recognises any associated liabilities which arise.

We believe that delivering a quality product in great places 
drives long-term profitability through the planning consents  
that we can secure, demand for the product and 
recommendations from our customers.

Commitments under the Homes and Places headings of  
Our Vision demonstrate Berkeley’s targets for continual 
improvement of the product that we deliver, and under the 
Customers heading to gain assurance, especially in the area  
of customer service, that the product delivers the right 
experience for our customers.

2015 Performance highlights (KPIs) 
(pages 02 to 03)
- Adjusted profit before tax
- Basic earnings per share
- Adjusted return on equity
- Net promoter score

Our Vision
- Homes (Page 40)
- Places (Page 42)

An increasingly 
competitive landscape 
has put increased 
pressure on costs and 
labour availability  
this year.

Our strong focus on 
maintaining quality  
of design and product  
has remained steady.

31

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2015  /  STRATEGIC REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIALSBERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2015  /  STRATEGIC REPORT

Where we operate

We focus on London and South of England,  
markets that we know and understand.

3232

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2015  /  STRATEGIC REPORTI

S
T
R
A
T
E
G
C
R
E
P
O
R
T

G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

I

F
N
A
N
C
A
L
S

I

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2015  /  STRATEGIC REPORT

South of 
England

25Sites outside London
100%

All sites with an  
implementable  
planning consent are  
in construction

Tunbridge Wells
Royal Wells Park is a new community  
of over 200 homes in Tunbridge Wells  
in Kent, which includes the construction  
of a new school.

Barns Green
69 homes and a school are being built  
in this West Sussex location.

London

49Sites in London
100%

All sites with an 
implementable consent  
are in construction

i

e
g
a
m
d
e
t
a
r
e
n
e
g
r
e
t
u
p
m
o
C

London Dock
A consent has been secured for over 1,800  
new homes at this former print works.

Kidbrooke Village
1,000 homes of 4,700 have already been  
built at this major regeneration scheme.

33
33

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2015  /  STRATEGIC REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORT 
 
 
 Where we operate 
continued

London

34 33

5

14 35

31

38

8
21

13

26
4

8

22

10
3

1

24
9

25
1

28

36
3

4

29

19

9

10

27

11

11

6

18 17

15

32

2

12

7

16

6

2

20

5

37

23

30

7

London under construction

London future sites

1   190 Strand
2    375 Kensington High Street  

(including Homebase and Telereal)
3   Abell & Cleland House, Westminster
4   Battersea Reach
5   Beaufort Park, Hendon 
6   Brewery Wharf, Twickenham
7   Chelsea Creek / Imperial Wharf
8   City Forum, City of London
9   The Corniche, Albert Embankment
10   Dickens Yard, Ealing
11   Fitzroy Gate, Isleworth
12   Fulham Reach, Hammersmith
13   Goodman’s Fields, Aldgate
14   High Road, Finchley
15   Hogarth, Chiswick
16   Hurlingham Gate, Fulham
17   Kew Bridge Road 
18   Kew Bridge West, Brentford
19   Kidbrooke Village

20   Kingston
21   London Dock, Wapping
22   Marine Wharf, Deptford
23   Marryat Place, Wimbledon
24   Merano, Albert Embankment
25   One Blackfriars, Southwark
26   One Tower Bridge
27   One Victoria Road, Acton
28   Riverlight, Battersea
29   Royal Arsenal Riverside
30   Saffron Square, Croydon
31   Smithfield Square, Hornsey
32   Sovereign Court, Hammersmith
33   St Joseph’s Gate, Mill Hill
34   Stanmore Place
35   The Avenue, Finchley
36   Vista, Battersea
37   Wimbledon Hill Park
38   Woodberry Park

34

1   22-26 Albert Embankment
2   Barnes, Richmond
3   Battersea Gardens
4   Chambers Wharf, Southwark
5   Kingston*
6   Latchmere House, Richmond
7   Orpington
8   South Quay Plaza, Docklands
9   Southall
10   Westminster
11   White City

*New sites contracted for acquisition during the year

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2015  /  STRATEGIC REPORTSouth of England

W

orc

e

s

t

e

r

s

19

h

ir

e

Warwickshire

Gloucestershire

6

Oxfordshire

n s h ir e

p t o

N ortha m

B
u

c

k

i

n

g

h

a

m

s

h

ir

e

Cambridgeshire

e
hir
s
d
r

dfo
e
B

e rtf o r d shire

H

Essex

10 4

2

LONDON

3

Wiltshire

Somerset

Berkshire

4
15

1

13 18
1

7

Hampshire

5

Surrey

12

2

5

8

11

Kent

3
16

17

West Sussex

East Sussex

9

14

Out of London under construction

Out of London future sites

1   Ascot
2   Barns Green
3   Bath
4   Beaconsfield
5   Caterham
6   Cirencester
7   Fleet
8   Gillingham
9   Gosport
10   High Wycombe

11   Holborough
12   Horsham
13   Maidenhead
14   North Bersted
15   Reading
16   Sevenoaks
17   Tunbridge Wells
18   Warfield
19   Worcester

1   Reading*
2   Rickmansworth*
3   Sevenoaks (2 sites)*
4   Taplow
5   Winchester*

*New sites contracted for acquisition during the year

35

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2015  /  STRATEGIC REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIALSBERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2015  /  STRATEGIC REPORT

£6 million has been raised by the Berkeley Foundation since its 
launch in March 2011, with 73% of Berkeley staff now involved. 
Funds are allocated to 5 Strategic Partnerships, 15 Designated 
Charities and One-off Community Investment Grants.
www.berkeleyfoundation.org.uk

36

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2015  /  STRATEGIC REPORT

Our plan and commitments for  
the business: ‘Our Vision’

Berkeley’s plan for the business is articulated through the  
framework of “Our Vision”. It sets out our aspiration to be  
a world-class business and five areas of focus. Every two years  
we set targeted, challenging commitments to meet in each of  
the five areas alongside our everyday actions.

I

S
T
R
A
T
E
G
C
R
E
P
O
R
T

G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

I

F
N
A
N
C
A
L
S

I

Our Vision
To be a world-class business generating long-term value by  
creating successful, sustainable places where people aspire to live.

Five Focus Areas

Customers

Homes

Places

Operations

Provide exceptional  
service to all of our  
customers and put  
them at the heart of 
our decisions.

Develop individually  
designed, high quality  
homes with low  
environmental impact.

Create great places  
where residents enjoy  
a good quality of life,  
now and in the future.

Make the right long-term 
decisions whilst running  
the business efficiently  
and working with our  
supply chain.

Develop a highly skilled workforce who run autonomous businesses, operate in a safe  
and supportive working environment, and contribute to wider society.

Our People

For Berkeley to generate long-term value, 
the skills, commitment and approach of 
our people throughout the business are 
crucial. We need to ensure that everyone 
has the right tools to enable them to 
work towards a common set of goals. Our 
Vision sets out our company values with 
five key focus areas and a series of clear 
strategic commitments to help empower 
our people and give them clear direction 
across every discipline of the business. 
Our Vision also helps to explain our 
approach and areas of focus externally.

In 2014 we set 16 challenging commitments 
to work towards over a two year period. 
These were determined based on input 
from an external stakeholder panel and 
issues review, together with consultation 
with each of our autonomous companies 
and specialist committees. We are now 
half way through the current two year 
cycle of commitments. 

The vision is underpinned by a core set of 
values. These are having integrity, being 
passionate about what we do, showing 
respect for people, thinking creatively and 
achieving excellence through detail. 

This culture informs the way we work,  
the way we lead the business, and what 
we deliver to our customers. We focus 
just as hard on the way we work as the 
products we deliver.

We expand on each of the five  
focus areas of Our Vision over the  
next few pages.

For more information see  
 www.berkeleygroup.co.uk/our-vision

37

 
Customers

Provide exceptional service to all of our customers  
and put them at the heart of our decisions.

Our approach

Why focus on customers

Our customers are at the heart of all our decisions. We 
aim to understand their needs and consistently meet 
or exceed their expectations. The service we provide 
is professional, efficient and helpful to make the home 
buying process as straightforward and enjoyable as 
possible. Our levels of customer service aim to be 
comparable to other top brands.

Ensuring our customers are satisfied is crucial to the 
ongoing success of the business; ultimately all  
areas of our strategy are focused on the end customer  
and putting them at the centre of our decisions.  
This extends beyond customer-facing activities,  
from the initial purchase of the land through to the 
design of the home and development.

All our customers are provided with a commitment 
that when they buy a new home from Berkeley they 
can be safe in the knowledge that it is built to very high 
standards of design and quality, has low environmental 
impact and that they will enjoy an exceptional customer 
experience. Each customer receives tailored information 
relating to their purchase and has a dedicated point of 
contact throughout the customer journey.

Everyday actions

Give every customer a dedicated point of contact at all stages in the customer journey

Clearly set out our commitment to our customers 

Incorporate information on sustainability and Our Vision within sales suites and marketing material 

Provide all customers with easy-to-use Living Guides to help them operate their home efficiently

Follow the sales manual to ensure consistently high standards

Key commitments for 2014 – 2016

Deliver world-class customer service measured though the Net Promoter Score

Launch an interactive way of communicating with our customers, ‘My Home Plus’

Market all our developments in the UK first

69.8 Net Promoter Score 

(Average NPS is 50, on a scale of -100 to +100)

Institute of Customer Service 
ServiceMark achieved across  
all businesses

98%

customers would recommend us to a friend

38

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2015  /  STRATEGIC REPORTSustainable living 
Our Vision sets out a commitment that we 
will develop homes with low environmental 
impact where residents can enjoy a good 
quality of life. To raise awareness of this 
from the outset, sales suites and marketing 
materials include information on all aspects 
of sustainability, from environmental 
features to community facilities.

Later in the purchasing process  
customers are given access to information 
on sustainable living and how to operate 
their home efficiently. After completion  
we seek feedback from our customers  
on the sustainability features to help  
inform our approach. 

Learn more about Customers at  
www.berkeleygroup.co.uk/ 
about-berkeley-group/ 
our-vision/customers

Customer service
We aim to provide exceptional customer 
service, from the moment someone 
enquires about a property, through 
the sales process, handover and post 
occupation. 

A customer’s experience should be 
professional, efficient and enjoyable and 
our high levels of customer satisfaction are 
testament to this. Over 98% of customers 
would recommend us to a friend and our 
Net Promoter Score ranks us alongside 
world-class brands such as Apple and  
First Direct.

We are delighted that, following joining 
the Institute of Customer Service in 2014, 
each of our operating businesses has now 
achieved the ServiceMark accreditation. This 
is a national standard based on customer 
feedback and engagement of employees 
which recognises our commitment to, and 
achievement in, customer service. We are 
the only developer with this accolade. 

In 2015 we launched a new sales manual 
to ensure a consistent approach and high 
standards across all developments. This 
supplements extensive training provided in 
2014 to all sales consultants and a range of 
online modules and assessments. 

My Home Plus
My Home Plus is an interactive online 
system enabling customers to receive 
information and communicate with us 
throughout the purchasing process, and 
after completion. The first phases of the 
new system were successfully launched in 
2015, with several developments trialling 
the portal. Customer feedback has been 
positive and we are now adding further 
functionality and sites. 

Customers will be able to receive updates, 
such as photos of the construction 
process, make specification choices online 
and access documents and manuals 
relating to their home.

UK First
International investors play a vital role in 
bringing inward investment into the UK. 
In London, they help to reflect the city’s 
status as a world-class city. However, we 
recognise that customers from the UK 
should be given priority. In August 2013, 
ahead of the Mayoral Concordat, we made 
a pledge to offer all developments in the 
UK before marketing overseas.

Our UK First Policy continues to be 
implemented on all schemes. This requires 
the initial sales launch to be in the UK first, 
and every individual home to be made 
available to customers in the UK either first 
or at the same time as launching overseas.

Ensuring our customers are satisfied is crucial to the ongoing success of the business.

39

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2015  /  STRATEGIC REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIALSHomes

Develop individually designed, high quality  
homes with low environmental impact.

Our approach

Why focus on homes

Each of our homes and developments is bespoke  
and we use qualified architects to design each scheme. 
Attention to detail in design is paramount to ensure 
homes meet the needs of our customers and our 
specifications are planned to meet the varied needs  
of all types of homebuyers, from luxurious houses to 
key worker apartments. The impact on the environment 
throughout the lifetime of the home is considered 
during its design with an aim to minimise impacts  
and provide home owners with the opportunity to  
live more sustainably. The high quality finish which  
we demand in our new homes requires a skilled 
workforce and thorough checks before handover.

As a residential-led developer, building high quality and 
well designed homes is fundamental to our business 
and is intrinsic to all the other areas of Our Vision. It is 
demanded of us by our customers and helps to set us 
apart from volume housebuilders. It is clear that to have 
a successful business, our focus has to be on the end 
product of the homes right from the outset.

Everyday actions

Ensure optimal layouts and specifications 

Complete detailed checks of every home prior to handover

Apply the principles of adaptability and flexibility

Ensure each home has recycling facilities

Key commitments for 2014 – 2016

Enable fibre broadband on all new homes and provide community Wi-Fi

Guarantee space standards for all new homes 

Launch a new R&D programme to utilise customer feedback and drive innovation through improved design

broadband-connected homes

100% new developments to provide fibre 
63%

Evening Standard Awards  
2014, Best London Home

individual homes supplied with low 
carbon or renewable technology

375 Kensington High Street

40

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2015  /  STRATEGIC REPORTBroadband and connectivity
The internet is now regarded as the fourth 
utility, with customers demanding better 
connected homes. We are committed to 
ensuring that fibre optic infrastructure is 
enabled in our homes. Where possible,  
we aim to set this up so it is ready to use 
on move-in day. To achieve connectivity  
we are reliant on third party infrastructure 
and service providers.

The majority of our new developments will 
be able to meet this commitment. We are 
also part of a Government and industry 
round table to find practical solutions for 
helping the whole industry to provide  
more connected homes. 

Space standards
Lack of space is one of the most common 
reasons why customers choose not to 
buy new build homes. In response, we 
were the first private developer to commit 
to minimum space standards across 
its portfolio. We believe this provides a 
genuinely better home for our customers.

We have set standards for three core 
aspects in every home we build, covering 
master bedroom size, floor-to-ceiling 
height and storage space. Since launching 
the commitment, the Government has 
published a new Nationally Described 
Space Standard for use from autumn  
2015 where it is referenced in local  
planning policy. 

We will meet the Government’s new 
standard where requested, and will 
continue to meet our three criteria in  
other locations.

Research and development
The design of our homes is continuously 
evolving. To help this process we are 
undertaking research and development  
in two key areas.

The first is to strengthen feedback loops 
between customers and other stakeholders 
and our design teams. The second element 
is research and development through 
trialling new processes, materials and 
products to further improve our homes. 

Bespoke design
There is no generic Berkeley scheme. Every 
design is bespoke and we use architects 
on every project, something which is 
uncommon within the industry. We 
continue to promote good urban design 
across the industry through sponsorship  
of the London Festival of Architecture. 

Attention to detail
The quality which we demand in our  
new homes requires a skilled workforce 
and attention to detail. We use our 
marketing suites as the benchmark for 
build quality and finish in each individual 
home. Every area is thoroughly checked 
before handover to ensure that high 
standards are maintained. 

Sustainability 
In March 2015 the Government concluded 
its review of housing standards, marking a 
significant change for the home building 
industry. With the Code for Sustainable 
Homes now withdrawn, alongside many 
other standards, we are reviewing our 
priorities. Our approach continues to be  
to achieve a high standard across all of  
our developments, regardless of location 
or tenure.

We are preparing for the implementation 
of Allowable Solutions from 2016 as part 
of the Government’s zero carbon homes 
policy. We also sit on the UK Green 
Building Council’s new round table on  
the future of sustainable homes. 

Homes for everyone
Berkeley builds for everyone: from  
families to first time buyers, students 
to older people, and luxury living to 
affordable housing. 

We are pleased to have won the First 
Time Buyer Award 2015 for our homes at 
Kidbrooke Village and are proud of the 
homes we deliver for every generation. 

Learn more about Homes at  
www.berkeleygroup.co.uk/ 
about-berkeley-group/ 
our-vision/homes

Left: Roman House, City of London  Right: Barns Green, West Sussex.

41

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2015  /  STRATEGIC REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIALSPlaces

Create great places where people enjoy a good  
quality of life, now and in the future.

Our approach

Why focus on places

To remain a developer of choice it is essential that  
we focus on the outcome of our developments in 
the long-term. This begins right from the outset by 
ensuring the location is right at land purchase, to 
focusing on placemaking during design and to  
ensuring that suitable management processes are  
in place once the development is occupied. 

We create well-designed, high quality, safe and 
sustainable places which will endure as settled, vibrant 
communities long into the future. These are places 
where people choose to live, work and spend their  
time, that directly encourage people’s wellbeing and 
quality of life, and offer them a space and a base from 
which to lead safe and fulfilling lives. Through our  
ability both to collaborate and to deliver, we aim to  
be the developer of choice for local authorities and 
existing communities. We believe that appreciating 
the needs of our customers and wider stakeholders 
before, during and after the delivery of our schemes 
and what makes them thrive as a community, is the 
right model for a truly successful and sustainable 
business in our sector.

Everyday actions

Apply our Community Engagement Strategy on all developments

Consult an ecologist for all developments and incorporate living roofs on all suitable  
apartment roof spaces

Incorporate rainwater harvesting, electric car charging points and cycle storage

Achieve at least BREEAM Very Good on offices, retail space, Extra Care and  
student accommodation

Key commitments for 2014 – 2016

Measure and increase people’s quality of life by applying a framework for social sustainability

Test new forms of estate management and community governance

Adapt all developments to climate change through measures on flooding, overheating and water shortage

assessments completed

20 social sustainability  
100%

new developments followed the  
community engagement strategy

Ideal Home Show Blue  
Ribbon Awards, Housing  
Development of the Year 

Kidbrooke Village

42

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2015  /  STRATEGIC REPORTQuality of life
In 2014 we launched a toolkit to help  
us measure and enhance people’s quality 
of life. We refer to it during the design 
process for all new developments and 
are committed to conducting a formal 
assessment pre-planning for every 
development of 100 homes or more. In 
2015 100% of these larger developments 
conducted a formal assessment. A report 
on life at Royal Arsenal Riverside showed 
that people report high levels of happiness, 
belonging, and trust in their neighbours. 
We presented the methodology at UK 
Green Building Council events in June  
and November and held a policy briefing  
in January on housing and wellbeing.

Estate management and  
community governance
Our work on quality of life and social  
sustainability has identified that 
placekeeping is as important as 
placemaking and that they should be 
thought about as two elements of  
the same process. 

We take a long-term view for our 
developments to ensure that they remain 
great places in which to live for decades  
to come. We have begun to review  
current estate management practices 
across the business.

A Clore Social Leadership Programme 
research project has been undertaken  
on one of our developments on the 
different management options for green 
and public space. 

Climate change adaptation
The effects of climate change are already 
being observed in the UK. Climate change 
adaptation is about taking action now to 
ensure that our homes and developments 
remain comfortable places in which to 
live in decades to come. In 2015, all new 
developments submitted for planning will 
incorporate climate change adaptation 
measures around the three key issues of 
flooding, overheating and water shortage.

Based on research during 2014, we have 
produced a checklist for our development 
teams to help them to identify which issues 
are likely to be most important on a site 
depending on the type of development 
planned and its location. 

Sustainability
Sustainability of the wider development  
is as important as the individual homes  
we create. Typically issues such as ecology 
and transport are the focus areas. We 
consult an ecologist on all schemes and 
incorporate living roofs on all suitable  
roof spaces. 

We were pleased that the new linear park 
and tree planting at Kidbrooke Village  
were highlighted as a best practice case 
study within the UK Green Building 
Council’s report on green infrastructure  
in February 2015.

Community engagement
Our Community Engagement Strategy is 
referred to for all new schemes. The type 
of engagement varies depending on the 
scheme and location. Many of our schemes 
adopt community planning strategies 
where local people are involved in the 
design, whereas others include different 
types of community events to share 
information and encourage input from  
an early stage. 

Partnerships
Partnership arrangements need to be 
tailored to suit each project, skilfully  
coordinating the investment and ambitions 
of Berkeley, the local authority, residents, 
Registered Social Landlords and other 
stakeholders. We listen to what local people 
and other partners want and incorporate 
this into the design wherever possible.

At Royal Wells Park we are working to 
build the first developer-led free school, 
whilst at Highwood in Horsham we have 
helped to deliver the second new road  
built in the district in 13 years; the first  
was also built by Berkeley. 

Learn more about Places at  
www.berkeleygroup.co.uk/ 
about-berkeley-group/ 
our-vision/places 

The Boat Race at Fulham Reach.

43

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2015  /  STRATEGIC REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIALSOperations

Make the right long-term decisions whilst running the business  
efficiently and working with our supply chain.

Our approach

Why focus on operations

Through recognition that the property market is 
inherently cyclical we make decisions with a focus on  
the long-term. We understand the operational risks 
in trying to successfully identify, design, build and sell 
homes and create new places. We aspire to maintain 
excellent partnerships with our supply chain to ensure 
that high quality services and materials are consistently 
provided and we are a client of choice. We support and 
engage with our supply chain and, through our supply 
chain, we help to provide employment and support to 
young people. We conduct our day-to-day operations 
in an environmentally efficient manner and with 
consideration to our neighbours.

Running our operations effectively and considerately is 
fundamental to the long-term success of the business. 
We need a skilled and reliable supply chain to help us 
deliver the pipeline of work and good relationships 
with local stakeholders are essential to maintain our 
reputation for quality.

Everyday actions

Communicate our requirements to contractors and procure on overall value rather than cost alone

Register all sites with the Considerate Constructors Scheme and achieve at least 38/50 in every audit

Ensure all timber is FSC or PEFC certified 

Implement water and carbon efficiency measures on each construction site and achieve a  
waste recycling rate of at least 90%

Key commitments for 2014 – 2016

Achieve a 50% increase in site-based apprenticeships and training

Launch a £2 million fund for the supply chain to support innovation in health and safety

Map our supply chain risks and develop a sustainable specification and procurement strategy

15% reduction in office carbon  

emissions per person

Considerate Constructors 
Scheme Awards 2015 
Most Considerate Site

MOST CONSIDERATE SITE

Roman House

41.6/50

Average Considerate Constructors Score  
(Industry average: 35.7)

44

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2015  /  STRATEGIC REPORTApprenticeships and training
Key challenges for industry and 
Government are to encourage young 
people into the industry and increase 
capability in the workforce to ensure that 
there are enough people with the right 
skills to deliver the pipeline of future work.

Our supply chain, as well as employees, 
industry bodies and universities, are 
encouraged to apply for a grant of up to 
£250,000 for an innovative idea. The fund 
has already received several successful 
applications. For more information, see 
www.berkeleygroup.co.uk/innovation-fund. 

Considerate construction
We are delighted that our approach to 
considerate construction continues to 
be recognised. One site, Roman House, 
was awarded with the most prestigious 
accolade in the UK, the Most Considerate 
Site award. 

We have produced a new booklet for our 
supply chain to help provide information 
on how to take on an apprentice and the 
funding available to help encourage uptake. 

The Berkeley Apprenticeship Scheme was 
launched at Kidbrooke Village in autumn 
2014 to offer 200 career opportunities over 
five years to local people and help increase 
the level of skilled workers. The first intake 
of apprentices are now working with the 
supply chain. Various other initiatives are  
in progress to encourage young people 
into the industry, including hosting the  
8th Annual Careers Fair at Imperial Wharf  
in March. 

Supply chain 
Once schemes are in production, the 
support of a reliable and competent supply 
chain is critical to success. Engagement 
with our suppliers is key to remaining a 
client of choice and achieving high quality 
outcomes, on time and on budget. 

In 2015 we have focused on making it easier 
for small businesses to work with us. Our 
paperwork has been simplified and there 
is a new online portal which includes all the 
pertinent documents contractors need to 
be aware of. Our Supply Chain Taskforce 
has also worked with new companies to 
broaden our potential supply chain. 

We continue to monitor the number of 
apprentices working on our sites and are 
planning more initiatives for 2016.

Innovation Fund
A new Innovation Fund for the supply 
chain was launched in January 2015 to 
promote innovation in health and safety 
which reduces construction-related risk, 
drives the industry forward and improves 
health and safety performance.

Sustainable procurement
We recognise that the majority of our 
sustainability impacts are likely to occur 
indirectly through the supply chain. In 
2015 we identified our top materials 
and undertook research into sustainable 
specification and procurement of these.  
A baselining exercise has been completed 
in advance of a new strategy being 
launched in 2016. 

Another site was awarded Runner-Up 
status, putting it in the top 30 sites in the 
country, alongside more than 30 other  
Gold, Silver and Bronze awards.

In August 2014 we were the first 
homebuilder to reach the milestone of  
500 sites registered and Goodman’s  
Fields is now one of the first ‘ultra sites’, 
a new initiative from the Scheme where 
services and materials are sourced from 
registered suppliers.

Resource efficiency
We are pleased to report that office carbon 
emissions per person have reduced by 15%. 
Further information on carbon emissions 
is set out within the Directors’ report on 
page 85. Our site waste recycling rate has 
remained above our target of 90%.  

Due to increasing legislation in this area, 
for example with the introduction of the 
Energy Savings Opportunity Scheme, we 
are in the process of implementing more 
advanced systems for recording  
and analysing information.

Learn more about Operations at  
www.berkeleygroup.co.uk/ 
about-berkeley-group/ 
our-vision/operations

Left: Site inspection at Fulham Reach, Hammersmith.

45

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2015  /  STRATEGIC REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIALSOur People

Develop a highly skilled workforce who run autonomous businesses, operate in  
a safe and supportive working environment, and contribute to wider society.

Our approach

Why focus on our people

A devolved business structure is at the heart of our 
strategy. Our recognised brands and autonomous 
operational teams carefully manage each individual 
scheme to ensure that the entrepreneurial spirit of  
the business continues. Recruiting and retaining a  
high calibre workforce is crucial to our approach.  
We must support both our direct employees and the  
wider workforce of the contractors working on our 
sites. We are proud to be safe; safety continues to  
be a key focus area across all of our operations, in  
addition to enhancing health and wellbeing. We  
also aim to have a positive impact on society and 
enable young people to get into work through our 
support of the Berkeley Foundation.

Our people are key to the development process, from 
the identification and purchase of land through to the 
sale of our homes and ongoing customer service. 

To run any business successfully it is vital to ensure 
that the workforce is highly skilled and motivated. 
We understand the importance of supporting all our 
employees to allow them to work in a safe environment 
and to continue to advance their knowledge and skills. 
Developing and retaining our workforce enables us to 
deliver our objectives and grow as a business. 

Everyday actions

Monitor staff retention rates and employee diversity

Undertake individual training assessments for each member of staff 

Monitor and report on accident and incident rates

Undertake unannounced H&S audits on all sites, in addition to weekly Director visits

Support the Job Creation Programme as part of the Berkeley Foundation

Key commitments for 2014 – 2016

Pay at least the Living Wage to all direct employees

Reduce energy costs by up to £500,000, investing 50% of the saving in new health  
and wellbeing initiatives

Encourage and support every member of staff to be involved with the Berkeley Foundation each year

Launch a talent management programme which develops new ideas to enhance the business

2.46 Accident Incident Rate

(Industry average: 4.12 (HSE, 2014 figures)

Gold Medal:  
Berkeley First, East Thames, 
Oxford and Chiltern

73%

Employees involved with the Berkeley Foundation
(2014: 64%)

46

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2015  /  STRATEGIC REPORTLiving Wage
The Living Wage is calculated according 
to the basic cost of living and provides 
enough for an acceptable standard of 
living. We pay at least the Living Wage 
to all our employees, and encourage our 
contractors to do so.

Energy and wellbeing
We have set a target to reduce energy 
consumption by around 10% each 
year across all aspects of the business 
including sites, offices and sales suites. In 
2015, we have focused on understanding 
consumption and charges for energy. 
A number of our sites are trialling more 
effective sub-metering and there has been a 
focus on out-of-hours usage and temporary 
electrics. We have also undertaken a 
comparison exercise of unit charges for 
energy across our different facilities.

Health and wellbeing initiatives have  
been selected locally and include well 
person clinics, office fruit baskets and 
exercise classes. 

The Berkeley Foundation
The percentage of staff engaged with 
the activities of the Berkeley Foundation 
increased from 64% to 73% in 2015. This 
includes fundraising, Give As You Earn and 
volunteering. Our aim is for all employees to 
be involved with the Foundation each year.

Over the last four years the Foundation  
has committed or invested more than  
£6 million to the lives of young people and 
their families, including a new three year 
agreement with Shelter.

The Job Creation Programme launched 
in 2013 has so far enabled more than 
400 unemployed people to get into 
work. Street Elite has been another major 
programme we have supported. We 
are delighted that a graduate of Street 
Elite, Yasar Ugar won the Construction 
Youth Trust Award in 2015 and 14 of the 
graduates of the scheme now work  
for us. For more information see  
www.berkeleyfoundation.org.uk.

Talent management
This commitment looks to recognise 
employees’ performance and potential and 
to provide support and further development 
through a focus on implementing their ideas 
to enhance the business. There are various 
talent management programmes in place 
across the operating businesses. Some are 
intensive schemes for selected individuals, 
whereas other businesses are progressing 
programmes for all staff.

There has been a focus in 2015 on improving 
inductions for new starters and on reviewing 
our approach to training, increasingly 
moving to a broader assessment of not 
only technical and safety skills, but also 
softer skills. 

We are delighted that one of our project 
managers, Damian Bates, won the 
prestigious accolade of the NHBC’s  
Pride in the Job Supreme Award for the 
multi-storey category in January. 

Supporting a diverse workforce
Our business continues to grow; we now 
have over 2,100 direct employees who 
are central to our success. Our employees 
work in a range of roles across more than 
100 sites and offices. Across the Group, 
37% of employees are female as are 30%  
of our Main Board directors.

In addition to our direct employees, we 
also support a large workforce through our 
contractors; in April 2015 more than 10,500 
people were working on our sites. 

Health and safety
In 2015 we rolled out new Group Health 
and Safety Standards to ensure a 
consistent approach across all of our 
sites and our supply chain. We have also 
launched a new strategy document which 
clearly sets out our approach. The launch 
of the Innovation Fund (summarised within 
the Operations section on page 45) is an 
example of a leading initiative to improve 
health and safety, not just within Berkeley 
but across the industry as a whole.

We are pleased to be able to report a 
reduced Accident Incident Rate (AIR) 
of 2.46 (2014: 2.92), demonstrating 
performance beyond the industry average. 
Our AFR is 0.12, down from 0.16 in 2014. 

Learn more about Our People at  
 www.berkeleygroup.co.uk/ 
about-berkeley-group/ 
our-vision/our-people

Employee diversity

Female

Male

Total

Total Employees

800 

1,378

2,178

Senior Management

Board of Directors

At 30 April 2015. 

2

3

5

10

7

13

Our people are key to the development process.

47

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2015  /  STRATEGIC REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIALSBERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2015  /  STRATEGIC REPORT

New apartment at  
Riverlight in Nine Elms.

48

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2015  /  STRATEGIC REPORT

Trading and Financial  
Review and Outlook

We have a plan to return £13 per share  
(over £1.7 billion) to shareholders by 2021 and  
to retain a successful and sustainable business  
thereafter. Our performance demonstrates  
that we are on track to achieve this.

I

S
T
R
A
T
E
G
C
R
E
P
O
R
T

G
O
V
E
R
N
A
N
C
E

I

F
N
A
N
C
A
L
S

I

Clockwise from top left: The Ashmiles, Barns Green; Wimbledon Hill Park, Wimbledon; Hurlingham Gate, Fulham; One Tower Bridge.

49

 
Trading and Financial Review and Outlook
continued

Overview
The operational highlights of the year 
ended 30 April 2015 were the start of a 
further eight new schemes across London 
and the South of England, the achievement 
of 28 new planning consents across these 
regions, which secure future delivery of 
schemes and value, and the announcement 
of our new joint venture with National Grid 
plc, St William, which is targeted to deliver 
over 7,000 new homes from 10 initial sites.

In terms of performance, Berkeley built 
and sold 3,355 new homes this year at 
an average selling price of £575,000. This 
led to an increase in adjusted pre-tax 
profits of £454.6 million, an increase of 
19.6% compared to last year, and a profit 
of £85.1 million from the sale of a portfolio 
of ground rent assets, giving total pre-tax 
earnings of £539.7 million.

After paying £243.5 million in dividends in 
the year, the Group has remained ungeared 
throughout, with net cash rising from  
£129.2 million at the start of the year to 
£430.9 million at 30 April 2015. In terms 
of visibility and outlook, the Group has 
reported cash due on forward sales at  
30 April 2015 of £3.0 billion, up from  
£2.3 billion last year, and estimated  
future gross margin in the land bank of  
£5.3 billion, an increase of £0.8 billion  
since last year.

Housing market
This year the housing market has returned 
to normal transaction levels from a high 
point in 2013/14. Domestic demand has 
been strong in our core markets of London 
and the South of England, whilst London 
has continued to benefit from a stable 
social and political environment, enabling  
it to attract inward investment from the  
UK and overseas. Berkeley has experienced 
sales price increases in line with those 
reported in the wider market and these 
have generally been matched by cost 
increases at a similar rate. 

A clear General Election result provides 
stability in the national political 
landscape and we are encouraged by the 
commitment to bring forward more public 
land and to existing initiatives, such as Help 
to Buy. The challenge, however, remains 
significant as development appraisals must 
factor in the considerable and needed 
contributions to local communities, 
currently funded through affordable 
housing subsidies and payments towards 
local infrastructure, such as transport, 
public realm, education and healthcare. It 
also encompasses operational capacity; 
having the skills, expertise and labour in a 
busy development sector to deliver new 
homes of the right quality. This complexity 
demands time, expertise and an appetite 
for risk underpinned by financial strength. 

London’s continued pre-eminence as a 
world city is a critical factor in addressing 
the capital’s housing shortage. It attracts 
the investment to fund development, as 
well as the diverse range of expertise and 
talent that make London such a unique 
place. For this reason, Berkeley considers 
it important that the UK continues to play 
a major role in, and operate as part of, the 
European Union.

Berkeley launched a number of new 
schemes to the market this year, from 
London Dock in Wapping to Smithfield 
Square in Hornsey and 250 City Road in 
Islington amongst others, all of which were 
marketed in the UK first and have been 
well received by customers. Berkeley’s 
focus remains on providing new places 
that benefit from quality of design, public 
realm, transport links and access to jobs 
and amenities.

The stable market has resulted in 
cancellation rates of 10%, which is below 
normal historic levels of 15% to 20% and 
completed stock remains at historically 
low levels, with 31 completed residential 
properties in inventories at 30 April 2015 
(39 at 30 April 2014). 

Income Statement
Year ended 30 April

Revenue from operations

Operating profit from operations

Net finance costs 

Share of joint ventures result

Adjusted profit before tax

Profit from sale of ground rent assets

Profit before tax

Tax

Profit after tax

Basic earnings per share

Pre-tax return on equity

Adjusted earnings per share

Adjusted pre-tax return on equity

Homes sold (excluding joint ventures)

2015
£’million

2,020.2

439.0

(12.7)

28.3

454.6

85.1

539.7

(116.2)

423.5

313.0p

35.1%

263.6p

29.5%

3,355

2014
£’million

1,620.6

374.8

(6.9)

12.1

380.0

-

380.0

(87.1)

292.9

221.8p

27.5%

221.8p

27.5%

3,742

Change
£’million

+399.6

+64.2

-5.8

+16.2

+74.6

+85.1

+159.7

-29.1

+130.6

+91.2p

+7.6%

+41.8p

+2.0%

%

+24.7%

+17.1%

+19.6%

+42.0%

+44.6%

+41.1%

+18.8%

Average selling price

£575,000

£423,000

50

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2015  /  STRATEGIC REPORTLand
Berkeley has made strong progress in 
delivering value into and from its land 
holdings during the year, and now has 
37,473 plots in its land bank. The Group’s 
land bank now incorporates previously 
identified pipeline sites as the risk on these 
has evolved over recent periods through 
delivery and planning.

The land bank is a combination of owned 
or contracted sites, most of which have a 
planning consent and are in construction, 
and the rest of which cannot be moved 
into development as they do not have an 
implementable planning consent and/or as 
there are practical technical constraints and 
challenges surrounding, for example, vacant 
possession which need to be resolved. We 
also hold a strategic pipeline of long-term 
options for in excess of 5,000 plots.

Following the announcement in November 
2014 of the formation of a joint venture 
with National Grid, St William, Berkeley 
is working closely with its partner to 
identify sites from across its portfolio 
to bring through into its pipeline and 
land holdings. This has the potential to 
deliver some 7,000 plots from an initial 10 
sites and is a clear source of future land. 
One site at Battersea was already in the 
Group’s land bank, and one further site at 
Rickmansworth has been added this year.

Land holdings

Owned

Contracted

Plots

Estimated sales value

Average selling price

Average plot cost

Land cost (%)

Estimated gross margin

Gross margin (%)

Berkeley has secured 28 planning  
consents this year, nine on schemes which 
did not previously have an implementable 
planning consent and 19 revised consents. 
The new consents include Fitzroy Gate 
in Isleworth, 250 City Road in Islington, 
22-29 Albert Embankment in Lambeth, 
Smithfield Square in Hornsey, South Quay 
Plaza in Docklands, and further residential 
schemes in Kingston, Bracknell, Barnes and 
Orpington in Kent. The revised consents 
have improved the planning position on 
each of the schemes on which earlier 
phases are already in construction, and 
these include a full re-plan of the third phase 
at Kidbrooke Village and a detailed consent 
on the waterfront block at Royal Arsenal 
Riverside which will contribute further 
impetus to this core regeneration scheme.

Since the year end, Berkeley has secured  
a resolution to grant planning at its scheme 
in White City for over 1,400 homes to be 
delivered over the next 15 years, and a 
resolution to grant planning for 839 at  
St William’s first scheme in Battersea.

Two new sites have been acquired 
unconditionally during the year, a 15,000 
sq ft office building in Sevenoaks and a 
scheme for over 600 homes in Reading 
in our St Edward joint venture. Three have 
been acquired on a conditional basis, 
including sites in Kingston and Winchester, 
as well as the second St William site at 
Rickmansworth.

At 30 April 2015, the Group has 74 sites in 
its land holdings, of which 57 (77%) have 
an implementable planning consent and 
are in construction, a further 10 (14%) have 
at least a resolution to grant planning but 
the consent is not yet implementable  
and seven remain in the planning process. 
The Group’s land holdings now stand 
at 37,473 plots (30 April 2014: 35,963 
restated to include 11,957 pipeline plots), 
with an estimated future gross margin 
of £5,272 million (30 April 2014: £4,514 
million, restated to include £1,500 million 
of pipeline gross margin) and an average 
selling price of £456,000 (30 April 2014: 
£419,000, restated to include pipeline 
revenue and plots).

Change

+6,210

-4,700

+1,510

April 2014

28,005

7,958

35,963

+£1,996m

£15,079m

+£37k

-£5k

-2.4%

+£758m

+1.0%

£419k

£63k

15.1%

£4,514m

29.9%

April 2015

34,215

3,258

37,473

£17,075m

£456k

£58k

12.7%

£5,272m

30.9%

51

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2015  /  STRATEGIC REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIALSTrading and Financial Review and Outlook
continued

Trading analysis
Revenue of £2,120.0 million in the year  
(2014: £1,620.6 million) included  
£2,020.2 million of revenue from  
operations (2014: £1,620.6 million) and 
£99.8 million from the sale of a portfolio  
of ground rent assets (2014: £nil).

a 90,000 sq ft hotel at Goodman’s Fields 
in Central London. The £15.6 million of 
revenue last year was mainly from the sale 
of retail space on developments including 
Marine Wharf in Deptford, Goodman’s Fields 
in Aldgate, Fulham Reach in Hammersmith 
and Imperial Wharf in Fulham.

The £2,020.2 million of revenue from 
operations included £1,936.2 million of 
residential revenue (2014: £1,605.0 million), 
£12.3 million from land sales on three sites 
(2014: £nil) and £71.7 million of commercial 
revenue (2014: £15.6 million).

3,355 new homes (2014: 3,742) were sold 
across London and the South of England 
at an average selling price of £575,000 
(2014: £423,000). The increase in average 
selling price reflects first completions 
at Ebury Square, Riverlight, Fulham 
Reach and One Tower Bridge, all London 
schemes acquired in 2009/10. The year 
ended 30 April 2014 included the disposal 
of 534 properties from Berkeley’s rental 
fund to M&G Investments at an average 
selling price of £197,000 and the sale of 
two student developments.

Revenue of £71.7 million from commercial 
activities (2014: £15.6 million) included the 
sale of some 130,000 sq ft of office, retail 
and leisure space across a number of the 
Group’s developments including Fulham 
Reach in Hammersmith, Langham Square 
in Putney and Royal Worcester as well as 

During the year, the Group sold a portfolio 
of approximately 10,000 ground rent 
leases across some 60 sites for proceeds 
of £99.8 million and a gross profit of  
£85.1 million. Income and expenses 
associated with this sale have been 
recognised in the income statement 
through revenue and gross profit.

The adjusted gross margin percentage, 
excluding profit from the sale of ground 
rent assets, has been broadly stable at 
31.3% (2014: 31.4%), and reflects the mix  
of homes sold in the period.

Overheads of £192.7 million (2014: £134.1 
million) included a charge of £47.0 million 
(2014: £nil) in respect of the Company’s 
decision to settle the tax and national 
insurance liabilities arising on the vesting 
of options for participants in Part B of 
the 2009 LTIP scheme on 15 April 2015, 
in lieu of issuing shares to this value, and 
the intention to do the same in respect of 
options vesting on 15 April 2016. Of this 
£47.0 million, £33.5 million is in respect of 
prior periods and £13.5 million in respect  
of the year ended 30 April 2015.

The result is that the Group’s adjusted 
operating margin, excluding the profit from 
sale of the ground rent assets, has reduced 
from 23.1% to 21.7% in the year. 

Berkeley’s share of the results of joint 
ventures was a profit of £28.3 million  
(2014: £12.1 million) which reflects a further 
230 completions at 375 Kensington High 
Street and Stanmore Place.

The Group has remained cash positive 
throughout the year, and also completed 
a refinancing of its corporate banking 
facilities. The result is that net finance costs 
in the year have increased from £6.9 million 
to £12.7 million. This includes £1.8 million 
in respect of the amortisation of ongoing 
facility fees and the expensing of the  
£3.9 million of unamortised fees in respect 
of the previous refinancing in 2012, and 
other finance income and costs including 
imputed interest on land creditors, which 
more than offset any interest income from 
cash holdings during the year.

Profit before tax: 2014 
Increase in gross margin  
from operations 
Profit on sale of ground rent assets 
Increase in overheads 
Increase in net finance costs 
Increase in result from joint ventures 

Profit before tax: 2015 

£’million

  380.0

122.8
85.1
  (58.6)
  (5.8)
16.2

  539.7

Analysis of capital employed

Investment in joint ventures

Other non-current assets

Inventories

Trade and other receivables

Trade and other payables
    - Deposits and on account receipts
    - Other trade payables

Current tax liabilities

Provisions

Capital employed

Analysis of inventories

Land not under development

Work in progress: land cost

Work in progress: build cost

Completed units

Change
£’million

-11.3

+7.1

+172.9

-13.4

-179.2
-89.1

+25.9

-18.0

-105.1

Change
£’million

-150.4

+12.5

-137.9

+301.3

+9.5

+172.9

April 2014
£’million

61.4

118.5

2,481.2

159.0

-741.7
-625.5

-83.7

-57.1

1,312.1

April 2014
£’million

492.4

786.1

1,278.5

1,180.3

22.4

2,481.2

April 2015
£’million

50.1

125.6

2,654.1

145.6

-920.9
-714.6

-57.8

-75.1

1,207.0

April 2015
£’million

342.0

798.6

1,140.6

1,481.6

31.9

2,654.1

52

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2015  /  STRATEGIC REPORT 
 
The Group ended the year ungeared 
with net cash of £430.9 million (30 April 
2014: £129.2 million). This is an increase of 
£301.7 million during the year (2014: £84.5 
million) as a result of £528.4 million of cash 
generated from operations (2014: £337.6 
million), £8.3 million from the disposal of 
rental fund properties (2014: £138.2 million) 
and a net inflow of £115.2 million  
in working capital (2014: net investment  
of £77.9 million), before tax and other  
cash outflows of £106.7 million (2014:  
£118.2 million) and dividends of £243.5 
million (2014: £195.2 million).

Adjusted pre-tax return on equity, 
excluding profit from the sale of ground 
rent assets, has increased from 27.5% 
to 29.5%. Basic earnings per share has 
risen by 41.1% from 221.8 pence to 313.0 
pence, which takes into account a further 
reduction in the corporate tax rate from 
21% to 20% in the year, and the issue of a 
further 1.3 million shares issued in April to 
satisfy share awards.

Taxation
The Group has an overall tax charge of 
£116.2 million for the year and an effective 
tax rate of 21.5%. The effective tax rate has 
fallen from 22.9% in line with the reduction 
in the UK headline rate of corporation 
tax to 20% with effect from 1 April 2015. 
The Group manages its tax affairs in an 
open and transparent manner with the 
tax authorities and observes all applicable 
rules and regulations in the countries in 
which it operates. Factors that may affect 
the Group’s tax charge in future periods 
include changes in tax legislation and the 
resolution of open issues. The Group holds 
tax provisions in respect of the potential 
tax liability that may arise on the resolution 
of open tax issues, however the amount 
ultimately payable may be lower than the 
amount accrued thus improving the overall 
profitability and cash flow of the Group in 
future periods. 

Cash flow

Adjusted profit before tax

Increase in inventories

Increase in customer deposits

Other working capital movements

Profit on sale of ground rents

Profit from sale of rental fund

Net receipts from/(investment in) joint ventures

Tax paid

Other movements

Cash inflow before dividends

Dividends

Increase in net cash

Opening net cash

Closing net cash

Financial position
Net assets increased over the course of the 
year by £196.6 million, or 13.6%, to £1,637.9 
million (2014: £1,441.3 million). This is after 
payment of £243.5 million of dividends and 
equates to a net asset value per share of 
1,199 pence, up 12.5% from 1,066 pence at 
30 April 2014.

Inventories have increased by £172.9 
million from £2,481.2 million at 30 April 
2014 to £2,654.1 million at 30 April 2015. 
Inventories include £342.0 million of land 
not under development (30 April 2014: 
£492.4 million), £2,280.2 million of work in 
progress (30 April 2014: £1,966.4 million) 
and £31.9 million of completed stock 
(30 April 2014: £22.4 million). With this 
continued investment in our schemes, 
upward pressure on costs and the limited 
availability of skilled labour and materials 
in the supply chain remain key challenges, 
albeit ones that we continue to manage.

Trade and other payables are £1,635.5 
million at 30 April 2015 (£1,367.2 million at 
30 April 2014). These include £920.9 million 
of on account receipts from customers 
(30 April 2014: £741.7 million), which have 
increased as a result of strong trading in the 
period, and land creditors of £205.1 million 
(30 April 2014: £210.0 million). Provisions 
of £75.1 million (30 April 2014: £57.1 million) 
include post completion development 
obligations and other provisions.

2015 £’million

2014 £’million

380.0

(414.5)

315.6

21.0

-

84.9

(5.2)

(92.4)

(9.7)

279.7

(195.2)

84.5

44.7

129.2

454.6

(172.9)

179.2

108.9

85.1

-

39.6

(140.5)

(8.8)

545.2

(243.5)

301.7

129.2

430.9

53

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2015  /  STRATEGIC REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIALSTrading and Financial Review and Outlook
continued

Banking
The Group’s financial position is further 
supported by the re-negotiation of the 
Group’s banking facilities during the year. 
On 23 March 2015, Berkeley increased its 
committed corporate banking facilities 
from £525 million to £575 million, extending 
the maturity date of the Group’s facilities 
from April 2018 (£250 million) and May 
2018 (£275 million) to March 2020 (£575 
million). This gives clarity of financing 
for five years, with options over a further 
two years of extensions, and has reduced 
materially the ongoing costs associated 
with the facility. A further £60 million of 
banking facilities in St Edward Homes, 
which were undrawn at 30 April 2014, were 
cancelled during the year as they were no 
longer required by the joint venture.

St Edward
Investments accounted for using the equity 
method have reduced from £61.4 million 
at 30 April 2014 to £50.1 million at 30 April 
2015 which reflects distributions in the year. 
This relates almost exclusively to Berkeley’s 
investment in St Edward, a joint venture 
with Prudential.

St Edward has three schemes currently 
in development at Stanmore Place, 375 
Kensington High Street and 190 Strand. 
230 homes were sold in the year at an 
average selling price of £1,229,000  
(2014: 203 at £1,235,000), which reflects  
the mix of properties sold, predominantly  
at 375 Kensington High Street.

2,116 plots in Berkeley’s land holdings relate 
to St Edward schemes (30 April 2014: 
1,389), which includes a site at Green Park in 
Reading which was acquired during the year.  

St Edward is continuing to identify 
opportunities to develop the joint venture 
through further sites to which it can add 
value, and controls a commercial site in 
Westminster which has a detailed planning 
consent but is conditional on vacant 
possession and is included in the land bank.

Ground rents
The Group has reported the sale of  
a portfolio of ground rent assets for  
£99.8 million, which gave rise to a profit  
on disposal of £85.1 million in its results  
for the year ended 30 April 2015.

The Group has exchanged contracts for 
the sale of a further portfolio of ground 
rent assets for £53 million. The sale is 
expected to be completed in the first  
half of the year ending 30 April 2016  
and give rise to a profit on disposal  
of approximately £50 million after 
transaction costs in that period.

Outlook
These results demonstrate a strong 
performance which has enabled Berkeley 
to meet its targets in returning the first 
434 pence per share to shareholders by 
the first milestone date of September 2015, 
and that it is well-placed, with the visibility 
of forward sales and developments already 
in construction, to meet the next milestone 
payment by September 2018, which it 
currently intends to do through regular 
equal dividends.

Whilst earnings remain sensitive to 
the timing of delivery of certain key 
developments, the Board currently expects 
adjusted earnings for the current year to 
be similar to 2014/15, and is targeting the 
delivery of pre-tax profits in the region 

of £2.0 billion over the three year period 
comprising 2015/16, 2016/17 and 2017/18. 
This target is a result both of Berkeley 
planning to deliver the London sites which 
were acquired in the period from 2009 and 
2013 and of continuing to benefit from the 
maturity of its longer term regeneration 
sites. The current year will see increased 
investment in construction ahead of this 
enhanced profit delivery. Any surplus capital 
generated through this period of investment 
and delivery, will either be reinvested in the 
business or used to fund further dividend 
payments or share buybacks.

There remain structural challenges to be 
addressed in our industry to meet the 
latent and ongoing demand for homes of 
all tenure types. Addressing these requires 
a regulatory environment that is responsive 
and supportive of development. It also 
requires the UK’s continued participation in 
the European Union to maintain London’s 
pre-eminence as a world city. 

The complexity of delivering new homes in 
London and the capital allocation required 
in a cyclical market is well understood by 
Berkeley and embedded in its strategy. As 
a consequence, the Group is well placed 
to achieve its targets for the next three 
years, meet its commitment to return over 
£1.7 billion to shareholders by 2021 and, 
with the visibility afforded by the land 
bank, provide a successful and sustainable 
business thereafter.

Rob Perrins
Managing Director
30 June 2015

Paid in year ended 30 April 2013

Paid in year ended 30 April 2014

Paid in year ended 30 April 2015

Interim dividend declared for payment in 
September 2015

Total paid or committed by 30 September 
2015 (first milestone) *

By 30 September 2018 (second milestone) *

By 30 September 2021 (third milestone) *

* Based on 136.6 million shares currently in issue

Pence
per
share

15

149

180

90

434

433

433

1,300

Returns to
Shareholders
£’million

20

195

244

123

582

591

591

1,764

54

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2015  /  STRATEGIC REPORTThe first phase of new family  
homes at Wimbledon Hill Park  
were completed this year.

55

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2015  /  STRATEGIC REPORTSTRATEGIC REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIALSGroundworks 
underway at the next 
phase of new homes  
at Fulham Reach in 
Hammersmith.

56

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2015  /  GOVERNANCEGovernance

57

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2015  /  GOVERNANCESTRATEGIC REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIALSBoard of Directors

Chairman and Executive Directors

Tony Pidgley CBE   N

Rob Perrins BSC (Hons) FCA

Richard Stearn FCA

Karl Whiteman BSC (Hons)

Co-founder of the Company 
in 1976 with Jim Farrer. He was 
appointed Group Chairman 
on 9 September 2009, having 
previously been the Group 
Managing Director since the 
formation of the Group in 1976 
and is currently Chairman of the 
London Chamber of Commerce 
and Industry. He is Chairman  
of the Nomination Committee.

Joined the Company in 1994. 
He was appointed to the 
Group Main Board on 1 May 
2001 on becoming Managing 
Director of Berkeley Homes 
plc. He became Group Finance 
Director on 2 November 2001, 
moving to his current role as 
Group Managing Director on  
9 September 2009. He is also  
a Governor of Wellington 
College and Aston University.

Re-joined Berkeley on 13 April 
2015 as Finance Director, having 
previously worked for the 
company from 2002 to 2011 as 
Group Financial Controller. Prior 
to re-joining Berkeley, Richard 
spent three years at Quintain 
Estates and Development plc, 
becoming its Finance Director in 
July 2012. He originally trained 
and practiced for 12 years as a 
chartered accountant with PwC.

Joined Berkeley in 1996 as  
a Construction Director and 
currently leads the Berkeley 
Homes East Thames division. 
He joined the Board on  
10 September 2009 as a 
Divisional Executive Director.

Non-executive Directors

Sir John Armitt   N   R

Adrian Li

Alison Nimmo CBE    A

Veronica Wadley   N   A

Appointed a Non-executive 
Director on 5 September 2011, 
Alison is Chief Executive of The 
Crown Estate. Prior to that she 
led the design and delivery of 
the London 2012 Olympic and 
Paralympic venues as Director 
of Regeneration and Design at 
the Olympic Delivery Authority. 
She is a trustee of the UK’s 
Green Building Council.

Appointed a Non-executive 
Director on 3 January 2012.  
She is currently Chair of the 
Arts Council London, a Senior 
Adviser to the Mayor of London 
and a National Council member 
of Arts Council England. 
Previously Editor of The 
Evening Standard, she is also an 
Independent Director of Times 
Newspapers Holdings Ltd.

Appointed a Non-executive 
Director on 1 October 2007 
and became Deputy Chairman 
on 5 September 2012. He is 
currently Chairman of the 
Olympic Delivery Authority, 
Chairman of National Express 
Group PLC, Chairman of City 
and Guilds and is a member 
of the Transport for London 
Board. He was Chairman of 
the Engineering and Physical 
Science Research Council  
until 31 March 2012. From  
2001 to 2007, he was Chief  
Executive of Network Rail  
and its predecessor, Railtrack.  
Sir John is the Senior 
Independent Director.

Appointed a Non-executive 
Director on 2 September 
2013. He is currently Executive 
Director and Deputy Chief 
Executive of The Bank of East 
Asia, Ltd. He is an Independent 
Non-executive Director of 
Sino Land Company Ltd., 
Tsim Sha Tsui Properties Ltd., 
Sino Hotels (Holdings) Ltd., 
China State Construction 
International Holdings Ltd. 
and COSCO Pacific Ltd. He is 
a member of the International 
Advisory Board of Abertis 
Infraestructuras, S.A.

58

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2015  /  GOVERNANCEChairman and Executive Directors

Non-executive Directors

Sean Ellis BSC (Hons)

Greg Fry FCA

Joined Berkeley in 2004 with 
an expertise in land and is 
currently Chairman of St James 
Group, Berkeley Homes Eastern 
Counties and St William Homes. 
He joined the Group Main 
Board on 9 September 2010 as 
a Divisional Executive Director.

Joined the Group in 1982 and  
is currently Chairman of St 
George, having been a Director 
since its inception in 1986. He 
was reappointed to the Group 
Main Board on 5 September 
2011 as a Divisional Executive 
Director, having previously  
been a member of the Group 
Main Board from 1 May 1996  
to 22 July 2010.

Jim Farrer

With great sadness we 
report that our Honorary Life 
President, Jim Farrer, passed 
away during the year. Jim, 
along with Tony Pidgley, was  
a co-founder of Berkeley  
and Group Chairman until  
his retirement in 1992.

Company Secretary

E A Driver

Glyn Barker BSc (Hons) FCA   A   R

Andy Myers BEng ACA   A   R

Appointed a Non-executive 
Director on 6 December 2013, 
he is currently Chief Financial 
Officer at McLaren Technology 
Group Limited, having previously 
held senior finance roles in Rolls 
Royce plc and BMW/Rover 
Group. He is Chairman of the 
Audit Committee.

Appointed a Non-executive 
Director on 3 January 2012 
following a 35 year career with 
PwC, most recently as its UK 
Vice Chairman. He previously 
held a number of senior posts 
within PwC including Managing 
Partner and Head of Assurance 
and also established and ran 
their Transactions Services 
business. Glyn is a Non-
executive Director of Aviva 
plc and Transocean Limited, 
Chairman of the law firm 
Irwin Mitchell and a Director 
of the English National Opera 
Company. He is Chairman of 
the Remuneration Committee. 

Diana Brightmore- 
Armour FCCA, MCT

Appointed as a Non-executive 
Director on 1 May 2014, Diana 
is currently the UK CEO of The 
Australia and New Zealand 
Banking Group Ltd and 
previously held the position 
of CEO, Corporate Banking at 
Lloyds Banking Group (2004-
2012). Diana has 30 years of 
international experience in 
banking, corporate finance, 
financial management,  
treasury and audit.

59

Key

N   Nomination Committee
A   Audit Committee
R   Remuneration Committee

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2015  /  GOVERNANCESTRATEGIC REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIALS Corporate Governance Report

The Company is committed to maintaining 
a high standard of corporate governance 
in respect of leadership, effectiveness, 
accountability, remuneration and 
relationships with our shareholders as 
identified by the UK Corporate Governance 
Code 2012 (the Code). In the year to 30 
April 2015, the revised principles and 
provisions of the Code (published In 
September 2012 by the Financial Reporting 
Council (FRC) applied to the Company. The 
provisions of the UK Corporate Governance 
Code 2014 will apply to the Company 
with effect from 1 May 2015 and so are not 
adopted in this report.

This section, including the Audit Committee 
Report and the Directors’ Remuneration 
Report, details how the Company has 
applied the principles and provisions of 
the Code. The Company’s business model 
is explained in the Strategic Report. It is 
the Board’s view that it has been fully 
compliant with the Code throughout the 
2014/15 financial year. A copy of the Code 
is available on the Financial Reporting 
Council’s website www.frc.org.uk

The Board
Role
The Board has a collective responsibility 
for promoting the long term success of the 
Company in a safe and sustainable manner 
in order to create shareholder value. The 
Board provides leadership and sets the 
Company’s strategic long-term objectives. 

Its duties are set out in a formal schedule 
of matters specifically reserved for decision 
by the Board, which include:

•	 	Overall	management	of	the	Group,	its	
strategy and long-term objectives;

•	 	Approval	of	corporate	plans;

•	 	Approval	of	all	material	corporate	

transactions;

•	 	Changes	to	the	Group’s	capital	structure;

•	 	Approval	of	the	Group’s	treasury	policy;	

•	 	Approval	of	the	Group’s	interim	and	
annual results, dividend policy and 
shareholder distributions;

•	 	Reviewing	the	Group’s	risks	and	system	

of internal control;

•	 	Changes	to	the	Board	and	other	senior	

executive roles;

•	 	Corporate	Governance	arrangements	

and the Board evaluation; and

•	 	Approval	of	policies	in	key	areas	

including Sustainability, Health & Safety 
and Business Ethics.

Composition, Diversity and Independence
At the date of this report the Board 
comprises thirteen Directors: the Chairman, 
five Executive Directors and seven 
independent Non-executive Directors. The 
biographies of these directors are set out 
on pages 58 and 59.

The Board has evolved over recent years to 
put in place the succession planning that 
all successful organisations require and 
the composition of the Board continues to 
be reviewed on a regular basis to ensure 
that an appropriate balance of skills is 
maintained. The Board has chosen not 
to set specific representation targets for 
women at Board level at this time. However, 
it recognises that the benefits of diversity, 
including gender diversity, will continue to 
be an active consideration when further 
changes to the Board’s composition are 
considered.

The Board considers that all of the current 
Non-executive Directors were independent 
throughout the year. At the Annual General 
Meeting on 1 September 2014, David 
Howell stepped down after ten years on 
the Board. The Non-executive Directors, 
led by the Senior Independent Director Sir 
John Armitt, have the skills, experience, 
independence and knowledge of the 
Company to enable them to discharge 
their respective duties and responsibilities 
effectively.

During the year, the Company dismissed 
its previous Finance Director, Mr Nicolas 
Simpkin, who left the Board on 8 
September 2014 and is currently on full 
paid garden leave until 23 September 2015.

Richard Stearn was appointed as an 
Executive Director, and re-joined the 
Company on 13 April 2015 in the role of 
Group Finance Director, having previously 
held the position of Group Financial 
Controller from 2002 to 2011. In the 
intervening period between the departure 
of Nicolas Simpkin and the appointment 
of Richard Stearn, the financial function of 
Berkeley was managed by Rob Perrins, the 
Group Managing Director and previously 
the Group Finance Director, supported by 
Ben Marks, the Group Financial Controller.

The Group Executive Directors do not hold 
any Non-executive Director appointments 
or commitments required to be disclosed 
under the Code. 

Chairman and Managing Director
The roles of Group Chairman and Group 
Managing Director are separately held and 
there are clear written guidelines 

60

to support the division of responsibility 
between them. The Group Chairman is 
responsible for the effective conduct of 
the Board and shareholder meetings and 
for ensuring that each Director contributes 
to effective decision-making. The Group 
Managing Director has day-to-day 
executive responsibility for the running 
of the Group’s businesses. His role is to 
develop and deliver the strategy to enable 
the Group to meet its objectives. 

Meetings
The Board met five times during 2014/15 
and there were no absences. 

In addition to the above formal meetings 
of the whole Board, the Non-executive 
Directors meet with the Group Chairman. 
The Group Managing Director and Group 
Finance Director are invited to attend these 
meetings in part, to provide an update on 
the business activities of the Group. The 
Non-executive Directors meet at least 
annually without the Group Chairman 
present, chaired by the Senior Independent 
Director.

Board papers and agendas are sent out 
in the week prior to each meeting, thus 
allowing sufficient time for detailed review 
and consideration of the documents 
beforehand. In addition, the Board is 
supplied with comprehensive management 
information on a regular basis. 

Election and re-election of Directors
The Articles of Association of the Company 
include the requirement for Directors to 
submit themselves to shareholders for 
re-election every three years. In addition, 
all Directors are subject to election by 
shareholders at the first opportunity 
after their appointment and thereafter at 
intervals of no more than three years.

However, in accordance with the 
requirements of the Code, all Directors 
offer themselves for re-election at the 
Annual General Meeting on 8 September 
2015.

Induction and development
On	appointment,	Non-executive	Directors	
are provided with a detailed induction 
programme. This covers an overview of 
the Group’s operations and its policies, 
corporate responsibility and corporate 
affairs issues, legal matters, and the 
opportunity to meet with Directors and key 
staff and to visit the Group’s sites.

No training needs were identified this year, 
although ongoing training is available to 
all Directors to meet their individual needs. 
Board members also receive guidance 

01_BERKAR15_CorpGovAud_60-65.indd   60

14/07/2015   10:06

berkeley AnnuAl report 2015  /  governAnceon regulatory matters and the corporate 
governance framework that the Group 
operates under.

Members of the Audit and Remuneration 
Committees received briefings from 
our auditors and remuneration advisers 
respectively to ensure they remain up 
to date with current regulations and 
developments.

All Directors have access to advice from 
the Company Secretary and independent 
professional advisers, at the Company’s 
expense, where specific expertise is 
required in the course of their duties. 

Board evaluation
The Code requires that the Board 
undertakes an annual evaluation of its own 
performance and that of its committees 
and individual directors with an externally 
facilitated evaluation conducted at least 
every three years. The Board evaluation 
for 2015 was, in accordance with Code 
Provision B.6.2, externally facilitated, 
carried out by Clare Howard Consultancies, 
who have no other connection with the 
Company. The Board evaluation covered:

•	 Strategic	matters

•	 	Board	structure,	committees	and	their	

operation

•	 Succession	planning

•	 Induction	and	development

•	 	Assessment	of	the	performance	of	

individual committees and the Chairman

•	 Shareholder	communication

The unanimous outcome of the review was 
that the Board works very well and that 
all the Directors are passionate about the 
business, and that they enjoy their role on 
the Board. 

The Board has a pivotal role in preserving 
the organisation’s culture and ultimately 
its success. In line with all successful 
organisations, succession planning is seen 
as a key focus for the Company and the 
Board continues to evolve to address this 
issue. The autonomous structure of the 
Group also provides strength in depth 
which further mitigates this risk.

An action plan has been agreed by the 
Board to address the recommendations 
made from the review.

Conflicts of interset
In accordance with the Companies 
Act 2006, the Company’s Articles of 
Association allow the Board to authorise 
potential conflicts of interest that may arise 

and to impose such limits or conditions 
as it thinks fit. The decision to authorise a 
conflict of interest can only be made by 
non-conflicted Directors (those who have 
no interest in the matter being considered) 
and in making such a decision the Directors 
must act in a way they consider in good 
faith will be most likely to promote the 
Company’s success. 

The Company has established a procedure 
whereby actual and potential conflicts of 
interest of current and proposed roles to be 
undertaken by Directors of the Board with 
other organisations are regularly reviewed 
in respect of both the nature of those 
roles, and their time commitment, and for 
proper authorisation to be sought prior to 
the appointment of any new director. The 
Board consider these procedures to be 
working effectively.

Insurance
The Company had in place at 30 April 
2015 an appropriate policy which insures 
Directors against certain liabilities, including 
legal costs, which they may incur in 
carrying out their duties. This remains in 
place.

Board committees
The Board has delegated certain matters 
to individual Executives and to the 
specific committees of the Board; audit, 
remuneration and nomination. The main 
three Board Committees operate within 
clearly defined Terms of Reference 
pursuant to the provisions of the Code. The 
Terms of Reference can be downloaded 
from the section dealing with Investor 
Relations on the Berkeley website (www.
berkeleygroup.co.uk). Copies are also 
available to shareholders on application to 
the Company Secretary.

The responsibilities of the key Board 
committees are described below. 

Executive committee
The Executive Committee meets monthly 
and reviews the financial and operating 
performance of all Group divisions and 
companies. The Group Managing Director, 
Rob Perrins, chairs this Committee and 
other members comprise, Tony Pidgley, 
Richard Stearn, Karl Whiteman, Sean 
Ellis and Greg Fry alongside other senior 
management.

Audit committee
The Audit Committee is responsible for 
monitoring and reviewing the financial 
reporting and accounting policies of 
the Company, reviewing the adequacy 
of internal controls and the activities of 

61

the Group’s internal audit function and 
overseeing the relationship with the 
external auditor. The Audit Committee 
comprises four independent Non-executive 
Directors. The Committee is chaired by 
Andy Myers and the other members at 30 
April 2015 were Alison Nimmo, Glyn Barker 
and Veronica Wadley. 

Andy Myers and Glyn Barker are all 
considered to have recent and relevant 
experience. Andy Myers is qualified as 
a chartered accountant and is currently 
Chief	Financial	Officer	at	McLaren	Group	
Limited	and	Glyn	Barker	is	also	qualified	as	
a chartered accountant, having previously 
held a number of senior posts within PwC 
including Managing Partner and Head of 
Assurance. 

The Committee met formally on three 
occasions during the year to 30 April 2015 
with no absences, with the exception of 
one meeting in March 2015 from which 
Veronica Wadley was absent.

An explanation of the role and activities 
of the Audit committee during the year is 
contained in the Audit Committee report 
on pages 64 and 65.

Remuneration committee 
The Remuneration Committee is 
responsible for determining the Company’s 
policy for Executive remuneration and 
the precise terms of employment and 
remuneration of the Executive Directors. 

At 30 April 2015, the Committee comprised 
Glyn Barker, Sir John Armitt and Andy 
Myers who are independent Non-executive 
Directors. The Committee was chaired by 
Glyn Barker.

The Committee met formally on three 
occasions during the year to April 2015 
with no absences.

No Director is involved in deciding his 
or her remuneration. The Executive 
Directors decide the remuneration of 
the Non-executive Directors and the 
Committee takes into consideration the 
recommendations of the Group Managing 
Director and Group Finance Director 
regarding the remuneration of their 
Executive colleagues.

The principles and details of Directors’ 
remuneration are contained in the 
Directors’ Remuneration Report on pages 
66 to 83.

Nomination committee
The Nomination Committee ensures 
that the membership and composition 
of the Board, including the balance of 

01_BERKAR15_CorpGovAud_60-65.indd   61

14/07/2015   10:06

berkeley AnnuAl report 2015  /  governAnceStrategic reportgovernanceFinancialS Corporate Governance Report
continued

skills, is appropriate, as well as giving full 
consideration to succession planning on a 
regular basis.

The Committee is chaired by the 
Group Chairman, Tony Pidgley, and the 
Independent Non-executive members at 
30 April 2015 were Sir John Armitt and 
Veronica Wadley. 

The Committee met formally on two 
occasions during the year to 30 April 2015 
with no absences.

During the year, the activities of the 
Committee included considering and 
making recommendations to the Board 
regarding the membership of the Board 
committees and reviewing succession 
plans for the Executive team.

The process for identifying and 
recommending new appointments 
includes a combination of discussions 
and consultations, in addition to formal 
interviews, utilising the services of 
independent recruitment specialists, as 
appropriate. 

Key risks and internal control
The Board acknowledges that it has overall 
responsibility for ensuring that the Group’s 
system of internal control comply with 
the UK Corporate Governance Code 2012 
and for reviewing its effectiveness, at least 
annually. 

Internal control procedures are designed 
to manage rather than eliminate the risk 
of failure to achieve business objectives, 
and can only provide reasonable and 
not absolute assurance against material 
misstatement or loss. 

There are ongoing processes and 
procedures for identifying, evaluating and 
managing the significant risks faced by the 
Group. These processes and procedures 
were in place from the start of the financial 
year to the date on which the 2015 Annual 
Report and Accounts were approved and 
accord with the Turnbull guidance issued 
in 2005.

The processes are regularly reviewed by 
the Board and include an annual review 
by the Directors of the operation and 
effectiveness of the system of internal 
control as part of its year end procedures. 
The key features of the system of internal 
control include:

Clear organisational structure
The Group operates through autonomous 
divisions and operating companies, each 
with	its	own	board.	Operating	company	
boards meet on a weekly basis and 

divisional boards on a monthly basis, and 
comprehensive information is prepared for 
such meetings on a standardised basis to 
cover all aspects of the business. Formal 
reporting lines and delegated levels of 
authority exist within this structure and the 
review of risk and performance occurs at 
multiple levels throughout the operating 
companies, divisions and at Group.

Risk assessment
Risk reporting is embedded within ongoing 
management reporting throughout 
the Group. At operating company and 
divisional level, Board meeting agendas 
and packs are structured around the key 
risks facing the Group. These risks include 
health and safety, sales, production (build 
cost and programme), land and planning, 
economic, regulatory and site specific 
matters.

In addition, there is a formalised process 
whereby each division produces quarterly 
risks and control reports that identify 
significant risks, the potential impact and 
the actions being taken to mitigate the 
risks. These risk reports are reviewed and 
updated regularly.

A Group Risk Management Report is 
presented at each Group Main Board 
Meeting, setting out the current factors 
affecting the risk profile of the Group, 
the mitigation of these risks and the key 
changes to this risk profile since the last 
report.

Financial reporting
A comprehensive budgeting and real-time 
forecasting system, covering both profit 
and cash, operates within the Group. This 
enables executive management to view 
key financial and operating data on a daily 
basis.	On	a	weekly	and	monthly	basis	
more formal reporting up to the Group 
Executives is prepared. The results of all 
operating units are reported monthly and 
compared to budget and forecast. 

There is a consolidation process in place 
which ensures that there is an audit trail 
between the Group’s financial reporting 
system and the Group’s statutory financial 
statements. 

Investment and contracting controls
The Group has clearly defined guidelines 
for the purchase and sale of land within 
the Group, which include detailed 
environmental, planning and financial 
appraisal and are subject to executive 
authorisation. Rigorous procedures are also 
followed for the selection of consultants 
and contractors. The review and 
monitoring of all build programmes and 

62

budgets are a fundamental element of the 
Company’s financial reporting cycle.

Policies and procedures
Policies and procedures, including 
operating and financial controls, are 
detailed in policies and procedures 
manuals that are refreshed and improved 
as appropriate. Training to staff is given 
where necessary. 

Central functions
Strong	central	functions,	including	Legal,	
Health & Safety and Company Secretarial, 
provide support and consistency to the 
rest of the Group. In addition, the principal 
treasury-related risks, decisions and control 
processes are managed by the Group 
Finance function, under the direction of the 
Group Finance Director. 

Internal audit
Internal auditors are in place at divisional 
and Group level to provide assurance 
on the operation of the Group’s control 
framework. 

Whistleblowing
The Group has a whistleblowing policy 
which has been communicated to all 
staff, where Directors, management, staff 
and external stakeholders can report in 
confidence any concerns they may have of 
malpractice, financial irregularity, breaches 
of any Group procedures, or other matters.  
The policy is available to view on the 
Group’s website.

Bribery act
The Board has responsibility for complying 
with the requirements of the Bribery Act 
2010 and is charged with overseeing the 
development and implementation of 
the Group’s policies and procedures and 
monitoring ongoing compliance. 

Relations with shareholders
The Company encourages active 
dialogue with its current and prospective 
shareholders through ongoing meetings 
with institutional investors. Major 
shareholders have the opportunity to 
meet all Directors after the Annual General 
Meeting in addition to individual meetings 
with the Company. 

Shareholders are also kept up to date 
with the Company’s activities through the 
Annual and Interim Reports and Interim 
Management Statements. In addition, the 
corporate website gives information on the 
Group and latest news, including regulatory 
announcements. The presentations made 
after the announcement of the preliminary 
and interim results are also available on the 
website. 

01_BERKAR15_CorpGovAud_60-65.indd   62

14/07/2015   10:06

berkeley AnnuAl report 2015  /  governAnceThe Board is kept informed of the views 
of the shareholders through periodic 
reports from the Company’s broker UBS. 
Additionally, the Non-executive Directors 
have the opportunity to attend the bi-
annual analyst presentations. 

The Senior Independent Director is 
available to shareholders if they have 
concerns where contact through the 
normal channels has failed or when such 
contact is inappropriate. 

Annual General Meeting 
All shareholders are invited to participate in 
the Annual General Meeting (“AGM”) where 
the Group Chairman, the Group Managing 
Director and the Chairmen of the Audit, 
Remuneration and Nomination Committees 
will be available to answer questions and 
will also be available for discussions with 
shareholders both prior to and after the 
meeting. 

In accordance with the Code, the Company 
arranges for the Annual Report and 
Accounts and related papers to be posted 
to shareholders so as to allow at least 20 
working days for consideration prior to the 
AGM. 

The Company complies with the provisions 
of the Code relating to the disclosure of 
proxy votes, which, including abstentions, 
are declared at the AGM after each 
resolution has been dealt with on a show 
of hands and are announced to the Stock 
Exchange shortly after the close of the 
meeting. The Company also complies 
with the requirements of the Code with 
the separation of resolutions and the 
attendance of the Chairmen of the Board 
Committees. 

The terms and conditions of appointment 
for the Non-executive Directors, which 
set out their expected time commitment, 
in addition to the service contracts for 
the Executive Directors, are available for 
inspection at the AGM and during normal 
business hours at the Company’s registered 
office. 

01_BERKAR15_CorpGovAud_60-65.indd   63

14/07/2015   10:06

63

berkeley AnnuAl report 2015  /  governAnceStrategic reportgovernanceFinancialS Audit Committee Report

the period is included in note 18 to the 
financial statements. 

•   Revenue recognition 

The Committee recognises that 
the Group’s accounting policy for 
revenue recognition, namely that 
properties are treated as sold and 
profits are recognised when contracts 
are exchanged and building work is 
physically complete, involves an element 
of judgement in determining the point 
at which building work is physically 
complete. The Committee reviewed the 
quantum of properties not yet legally 
completed at each balance sheet date in 
conjunction with the review undertaken 
by the Group’s external auditor and 
concluded that the judgements were 
appropriate. 

The Board of Directors presents its Audit 
Committee Report for the year ended 30 
April 2015 which has been prepared on the 
recommendation of the Audit Committee 
(“the Committee”).

statements issued during the year. 
The Committee’s review incorporated 
consideration of the appropriateness of the 
relevant accounting policies and financial 
reporting judgements adopted therein.

The report has been prepared in 
accordance with the requirements of the 
UK Corporate Governance Code, Schedule 
8	of	the	Large	&	Medium-Sized	Companies	
and Groups (Accounts and Reports) 
Regulations	2008,	and	the	Listing	Rules	of	
the Financial Conduct Authority.

The Committee’s review of the Annual 
Report concentrated on whether, 
taken as a whole, it was fair, balanced 
and understandable and provided the 
information necessary for users of the 
Annual Report to assess the Group’s 
business strategy and performance.

Details of the composition, experience and 
the number of meetings of the Committee 
are reported on page 61 of the Corporate 
Governance Report.

Role and responsibilities of the Audit 
committee
The Committee has formal Terms of 
Reference which set out its role and the 
authority delegated to it by the Board. The 
key responsibilities of the Committee are 
as follows:

•   Financial Reporting 

Monitoring the integrity of the financial 
reporting of the Company and reviewing 
significant financial reporting issues and 
accounting policies;

•   Internal Control and Internal Audit 

Reviewing the adequacy and 
effectiveness of the Group’s internal 
control and risk management systems 
and monitoring the effectiveness of the 
Group’s internal audit function; and

•   External Audit 

Overseeing	the	relationship	with	the	
external auditor, including appointment, 
removal and fees, and ensuring the 
auditor’s independence and the 
effectiveness of the audit process.

This report considers each of these 
responsibilities in turn, and how the 
Committee has discharged them during 
the year.

Financial reporting
At each of the Audit Committee meetings, 
the Group Managing Director and/or 
the Group Finance Director presented, 
and the Committee debated, the results 
and business plan of the Group and any 
significant financial reporting judgements 
relevant to this.

The Committee reviewed, prior to their 
publication, the financial disclosures in 
the Group’s Annual Report and Accounts, 
Preliminary Announcement, Interim Report 
and the contents of interim management 

The views of the Group’s auditor, which 
was in attendance at each meeting of the 
Committee during the year, were taken 
into account in reaching its conclusions on 
these matters.

The significant matters considered by the 
Committee in 2015 included:

•   Carrying value of inventories and 

•   Share-based payments 

margin recognition 
Inventories comprise land not under 
development, work in progress and 
completed units, which are held in 
the balance sheet at the lower of 
cost and net realisable value. This 
demands a periodic assessment by the 
management team of each of Berkeley’s 
sites which is sensitive to assumptions 
in terms of future sales prices and 
construction costs and recognises the 
inherently cyclical nature of the property 
market and the risks of delivery. These 
assumptions are also relevant to the 
determination of profit recognised on 
properties sold. The conclusions of this 
assessment were reported by exception 
to the Committee in a financial overview 
paper prior to release of the Group’s 
annual and interim results.

•   Provisions 

The Committee recognises that 
accounting for provisions relies on 
management judgement in estimating 
the quantum and timing of outflows of 
resources to settle any associated legal 
or constructive obligations. The Group 
holds provisions for post-completion 
development obligations, onerous lease, 
estate liabilities and other litigation. The 
basis for determining these provisions 
was presented to the Committee for 
their consideration. The Committee 
reviewed the relevant papers and 
discussed the assumptions underlying 
this determination with management 
and the Group’s external auditor and 
concluded that it was satisfied that the 
assumptions adopted were appropriate. 
A table of movements in provisions over 

64

The Committee recognises that 
accounting for share-based payments 
represents a complex accounting area 
and particularly so in a year in which 
there was a modification in the method 
of settlement. The Committee reviewed 
the impact of this modification in 
conjunction with the external auditor’s 
assessment and concluded that the 
judgement and application were 
appropriate.

•   Compliance with laws and regulations 
The Committee recognises that the 
Company is subject to laws and 
regulations across a number of areas 
including, but not limited to, anti-bribery, 
anti-money laundering and sanctions 
checking. The Committee considered 
the Group’s approach to reviewing and 
updating its policies with respect to 
compliance with laws and regulations. 
In performing this review, it considered 
relevant legal matters. The Committee 
was satisfied that there were no material 
instances of non-compliance.

Other	matters	considered	by	the	
Committee included management’s 
assessment of the going concern status of 
the Group at the balance sheet date. The 
Committee concurred with management’s 
adopted approach on all of these matters.

Since the year end, the Committee has 
completed its review of the 2015 Annual 
Report and has confirmed to the Board 
that it considers it to be fair, balanced and 
understandable.

01_BERKAR15_CorpGovAud_60-65.indd   64

14/07/2015   10:06

berkeley AnnuAl report 2015  /  governAnceat each meeting. There is open dialogue 
between KPMG and the Company’s senior 
finance team to monitor any proposed new 
instructions. 

The Committee has concluded that 
it is comfortable that the auditors are 
independent.

Appointment of KPMG
On	completion	of	the	audit,	the	
Committee reviewed the performance and 
effectiveness of KPMG with feedback from 
executive management. The Committee 
has resolved to propose KPMG’s 
appointment at the 2015 Annual General 
Meeting.

The Committee remains mindful of 
evolving best practice under the UK 
Corporate Governance Code 2012, and 
will monitor the proposals of the Financial 
Reporting Council and the European Union 
in determining its future approach to re-
tendering the external audit appointment.

A Myers
Chairman, audit committee
30 June 2015

Internal control and internal audit
The Committee undertook its annual 
review of the Group’s Internal Control 
Framework during the year. This review 
focused on the system of risk management 
and internal control in place which is 
explained in more detail on page 62 of 
the Corporate Governance Report, and 
covered:

•	 	the	key	risks	facing	the	Group;

•	 	the	key	elements	of	the	Group’s	control	

processes to mitigate these risks;

•	 	the	operations	and	effectiveness	of	

internal audit.

A paper was also presented to the 
Committee which summarised the Group’s 
consideration, controls and monitoring of 
fraud risk across its activities.

The Committee also considered any 
internal control recommendations 
raised by the Group’s auditors during 
the course of the external audit and the 
company’s response to dealing with such 
recommendations.

A report summarising the recent activities 
of the Internal Audit function within 
Berkeley was presented to each of the 
Committee meetings during the year. 
These reports covered:

•	 	a	summary	of	the	key	findings	arising	
from the most recent formal internal 
audits undertaken;

•	 	management	responses	to	any	control	

weaknesses identified, the closure of any 
open items and any recurring themes;

•	 	the	outcome	of	other	operational	review	
work undertaken by the internal audit 
function;

•	 	the	internal	audit	plan	for	the	coming	

year, for debate with and the approval of 
the Committee.

The Committee was satisfied that the 
scope, extent and effectiveness of the 
Internal Audit function are appropriate for 
the Group.

External audit
Following a competitive tender 
process for the audit of the Company 
and its subsidiaries undertaken in the 
year	ended	30	April	2014,	KPMG	LLP	
(“KPMG”) was identified to replace 
PricewaterhouseCoopers	LLP	as	the	
Company’s auditor and consequently 
was appointed to fill a casual vacancy in 
accordance with the Companies Act 2006. 
The appointment of KPMG was approved 
at the 2014 Annual General Meeting.

Approach
KPMG presented its audit strategy to the 
Audit Committee meeting during the 
year. The strategy document identified its 
assessment of the key risks of the business 
for the purpose of the audit, the scope of 
their work and updated the Committee on 
regulatory changes for the current year.

KPMG reported to the Committee at the 
year end, prior to the public announcement 
of the Company’s results, in which it set 
out its assessment of the Company’s 
judgements and estimates in respect of 
these risks and any other findings arising 
from its work.

The external auditors have open recourse 
to the Non-executive Directors should 
they consider it necessary. There is private 
dialogue between the Chairman of the 
Audit Committee and the external auditors 
prior to each Audit Committee meeting 
and, after each meeting, the opportunity 
for the Committee to meet with the 
external auditors without the Executive 
Directors and management present.

Independence of the external auditors
As part of its audit strategy presentation, 
and through the audit tender process, 
KPMG identified the safeguards in 
place within its internal processes and 
procedures to protect, in respect of its own 
role, the independence of its audit.

The Committee has a policy on the use of 
the auditors for non-audit services in order 
to safeguard auditor independence and 
the ratio of audit fees (including the fees 
for the Interim Review) to non-audit fees 
should be no greater than 1:1. The ratio for 
the year ended 30 April 2015 was within 
the limits of this ratio. Audit and non-audit 
fee disclosures are set out in Note 5 of the 
Consolidated Financial Statements.

Any departure from this ratio will only 
be as a consequence of transactional 
work, where the Committee considers it 
is right for the auditors to undertake such 
work where the reasons for doing so are 
compelling, such as where:

i)  it is proprietary to them;

ii)  they have pre-existing knowledge and 
experience that precludes the use of 
alternative firms;

iii)  the nature of the transaction is such 

that the Group’s auditors are the only 
practical solution.

Non-audit work carried out by all 
accounting firms, including the auditors, is 
formally reported to the Audit Committee 

65

01_BERKAR15_CorpGovAud_60-65.indd   65

14/07/2015   10:06

berkeley AnnuAl report 2015  /  governAnceStrategic reportgovernanceFinancialSDirectors’ Remuneration Report

Annual statement from Chairman of Remuneration Committee 

Dear Shareholder

This Remuneration Report is split into two parts:

•	 	Our Remuneration at a Glance sets out a summary of Berkeley’s Directors’ Remuneration policy and the key remuneration decisions 

made by the Committee for the financial year ending 30 April 2015. 

•	 	The	Annual Report on Remuneration sets out payments and awards made to the Directors and details the link between Company 

performance and remuneration for the 2014/15 financial year. 

The Annual Report on Remuneration together with this letter is subject to an advisory shareholder vote at the AGM in September 2015. 
The sections of this report that have been subject to audit are labelled accordingly.

In line with the The Large and Medium-sized Companies and Groups (Accounts and Reports) (Amendment) Regulations 2013, 
the Directors’ Remuneration Policy has not been presented in this report given that the Policy was approved at last year’s AGM on 
1 September 2014 and it is not intended to move a similar resolution again at the 2015 AGM. The Directors’ Remuneration Policy is 
available to view in full on the Company’s website at www.berkeleygroup.co.uk/investor-information/corporate-governance.

Corporate Performance
Berkeley has delivered strong performance and growth during 2014/15, with the key highlights being:

•	 Adjusted*	pre-tax	return	on	shareholders’	equity	of	29.5%	(2014:	27.5%).

•	 Dividends	paid	to	shareholders	of	£243	million	(2014:	£195	million).

•	 Future	anticipated	gross	margin	in	the	land	bank	up	16.8%	to	£5,272	million	(2014:	£4,514	million).

•	 Adjusted*	earnings	per	share	increased	by	18.8%	to	263.6	pence	(2014:	221.8	pence).

•	 Net	asset	value	per	share	increased	by	12.5%	to	1,199.3	pence	(2014:	1,065.6	pence).

The results continue to underline the Group’s strategy of balancing earnings in the near term and creating a sustainable business, 
delivering value to shareholders over the long term.

Berkeley’s	Return	on	Equity	compared	with	the	sector	over	the	last	seven	years	illustrates	the	relative	performance	of	the	Company:

2008/9

2009/10

2010/11

2011/12

2012/13

2013/14

2014/15

Berkeley

Sector highest

Sector lowest

16.2%

16.2%

13.3%

13.3%

15.3%

15.3%

21.2%

21.2%

(73.4%)

(44.2%)

(6.2%)

(0.4%)

Sector average (excluding Berkeley)

(26.0%)

(18.1%)

1.0%

4.8%

*	Adjusted	figures	exclude	gross	margin	from	the	sale	of	ground	rents

22.4%

22.4%

3.4%

8.5%

27.5%

27.5%

3.5%

11.4%

29.5%*

29.5%

12.2%

18.2%

Berkeley’s	total	shareholder	return,	when	compared	to	the	companies	in	the	sector	and	also	the	FTSE	250	and	FTSE	All	Share	indices,	
illustrates the value delivered to shareholders over the long term.

Total shareholder return from 30 April 2005 (%)

550

500

450

400

350

300

250

200

150

100

50

0
2005

2006

2007

2008

2009

2010

2011

2012

2013

2014

2015

66

Berkeley Group 
Holdings plc

FTSE 250 Index

FTSE All Share Index

Sector

02_BERKAR15_DirRemReport_66-87NEW.indd   66

14/07/2015   10:45

berkeley AnnuAl report 2015  /  governAnceBerkeley’s	remuneration	policy	aims	to	encourage,	reward	and	retain	the	Executives	and	ensure	that	their	actions	are	aligned	with	the	
Company’s	strategy.	In	particular,	the	emphasis	on	performance	related	pay	aligns	the	Executives	with	the	performance	of	the	business	
which	is	coupled	with	long	term	incentives	that	lock	in	the	Executive	team	for	up	to	10	years	which	is	far	longer	than	is	typical	in	most	
publicly listed companies.

Incentive Outcomes in 2014/15
The key incentive outcomes from the performance this year are:

•	 A	W	Pidgley,	R	C	Perrins,	G	J	Fry,	K	Whiteman	and	S	Ellis	earned	100%	of	the	maximum	annual	contribution	under	the	Bonus	Plan;

•	 	50%	of	the	2009	LTIP	Part	B	awards	vested	during	the	year.	The	exercise	of	these	awards	resulted	in	a	significant	increase	in	

shareholding	for	A	W	Pidgley,	R	C	Perrins,	G	J	Fry,	K	Whiteman	and	S	Ellis.

Operation of Policy in 2015/16
There are no material changes to the operation of the policy for 2015/16. 

The	Executive	Directors	have	received	salary	increases	for	2015/16	of	approximately	3%,	compared	to	average	salary	increases	across	
the	Group	of	5.2%.

In addition 2015/16 will be the first year of operation of the new Bonus Plan which formed part of the Directors’ Remuneration Policy 
approved last year at the AGM on 1 September 2014.

The	Committee	is	comfortable	that	its	Directors’	Remuneration	Policy	is	in	line	with	the	new	UK	Corporate	Governance	Code	(applying	
for	financial	years	beginning	on	or	after	1	October	2014).	We	provide	further	details	on	page	72.

In conclusion

The Directors’ Remuneration Policy was subject to a binding vote at the AGM in September 2014, and will last for a period of three years 
from that date or until another Policy is approved in a general meeting. The Annual Report on Remuneration together with this letter will 
be subject to an advisory shareholder vote at the forthcoming AGM in September 2015.

Details	of	voting	at	last	year’s	Annual	General	Meeting,	where	95.88%	and	91.61%	of	those	voting	supported	the	resolutions	to	approve	
the	Directors’	Remuneration	Policy	and	the	Annual	Report	on	Remuneration	respectively,	are	set	out	on	page	83	of	this	report.

I look forward to receiving your support for the resolution seeking approval of the Annual Report on Remuneration at our forthcoming 
AGM.

Glyn Barker
Chairman, Remuneration Committee 

02_BERKAR15_DirRemReport_66-87NEW.indd   67

14/07/2015   10:45

67

berkeley AnnuAl report 2015  /  governAnceStrategic reportgovernanceFinancialSDirectors’ Remuneration Report
continued

Our remuneration at a glance
Ahead of the detail behind payments for 2014/15, I would like to take this opportunity to outline the Committee’s policy, key decisions 
and performance outcomes during the past year.

Summary of Directors’ Remuneration Policy

Element

Policy summary description

Maximum opportunity

Executive Directors

Base salary

Core element of remuneration, set at a level which is sufficiently competitive 
to	recruit	and	retain	Executive	Directors	of	the	appropriate	calibre	and	
experience	to	achieve	the	Company’s	business	strategy.

In setting levels of base salary, the Committee takes into account the following 
factors:

•	 The	individual	Executive	Director’s	experience	and	responsibilities;

•	 	The	levels	of	base	salary	for	similar	positions	with	comparable	status,	
responsibility and skills in organisations of broadly similar size and 
complexity;

•	 The	performance	of	the	individual	Executive	Director	and	the	Group;

•	 Pay	and	conditions	throughout	the	Group.

Where	an	Executive	is	extremely	
experienced	and	has	a	long-track	
record of proven performance 
salaries may be in the upper decile 
when compared to companies 
of broadly comparable size and 
complexity	–	in	particular	those	
within the comparator group and 
those	in	the	FTSE	250.

In general salary rises will be limited 
to the level provided to employees 
of the Company as a whole.

Pension and benefits

The Company’s policy is either to provide a contribution to a pension 
arrangement or provide payments in lieu of pension.

The	maximum	contribution	or	
payment	in	lieu	is	25%	of	salary.

Other	benefits	are	provided	to	the	Executive	Directors	including	a	fully	
expensed	company	car	or	cash	allowance	alternative,	medical	insurance	and	
other benefits may be provided from time to time.

Levels of benefits are defined by 
market rates.

Annual bonus

This summary relates 
to	the	new	six-year	
Bonus Plan approved 
by shareholders at the 
2014 AGM.

The Bonus Plan aligns rewards to the key objectives linked to short to 
medium term performance whilst ensuring that there is a balance between 
incentivising	the	Executive	Directors,	providing	a	sustainable	ongoing	level	
of return to shareholders and ensuring the long term sustainability of the 
Company.

Under	the	Bonus	Plan	awards	are	earned	annually	over	a	six	year	plan	period,	
subject to stretching Group and Divisional performance targets. 

50%	of	a	participants	plan	account	will	be	paid	out	annually	for	the	first	five	
years	with	100%	of	the	balance	paid	at	the	end	of	the	sixth	plan	year.

300%	of	salary.

Long term Incentives

No	plan	available	for	new	grants	during	the	three	year	Policy	Period	unless,	on	recruitment,	where	a	new	Executive	
Director may be eligible to participate in the 2011 LTIP and also provided the total number of awards granted to all 
participants	do	not	exceed	the	limits	agreed	with	shareholders	at	the	2011	AGM.

Shareholding 
requirement

The Committee operates a system of shareholder guidelines to encourage 
long-term	share	ownership	by	the	Executive	Directors.	

This	should	be	achieved	within	five	years	of	appointment	for	Executive	
Directors.

400%	of	base	salary	for	the	Group	
Chairman,	200%	of	base	salary	for	
other	Executive	Directors.

Non-executive Directors

Fees

Each	Non-executive	Director	receives	a	fee	which	relates	to	membership	of	
the Board and additional fees are paid for Committee Chairmanship.

In setting fees, the Board looks 
at	the	upper	quartile	fee	levels	of	
companies of broadly similar size 
and	complexity	–	in	particular	those	
within the comparator group and 
those	in	the	FTSE	250.

In general fee rises will be limited to 
the level provided to employees of 
the Company as a whole.

The Directors’ Remuneration Policy is available to view in full on the Company’s website at  
www.berkeleygroup.co.uk/investor-information/corporate-governance.

68

02_BERKAR15_DirRemReport_66-87NEW.indd   68

14/07/2015   10:45

berkeley AnnuAl report 2015  /  governAnceHow have we performed against our 2014/15 Bonus Plan objectives?
The following table sets out the various performance metrics targeted by the Bonus Plan and how the Company has performed against 
these metrics in respect of 2014/15. It should be noted that this is the last year of the operation of the five-year Bonus Plan that has been 
in operation since the start of the 2010/11 financial year.

Bonus Plan performance conditions

Targets set at the start of the year

Group performance 
condition - 100% 
weighting for the 
Group Executives, 50% 
weighting for Divisional 
Directors

Return on 
Equity

Land Bank 
Growth

ROE	of	25%	(maximum	target)

Land	Bank	Growth	of	5%	(maximum	target)

Divisional PBT 
performance condition 
for the Divisional 
Directors - 50% 
weighting for Divisional 
Directors

Notes

Divisional 
PBT targets

Divisional PBT targets are set at the beginning of the 
financial year at a level which is challenging taking into 
account the potential level of bonus payments, the market, 
development availability and other relevant issues. Disclosure 
of PBT targets are considered to be commercially sensitive 
as the disclosure of such details could be detrimental to the 
Company’s future strategic plans.

Percentage 
of bonus 
element 
earned 
following 
assessment 
against the 
performance 
targets

100%

100%

Actual 
performance 
outcome

29.5%	 
ROE(1)

16.8%	 Land	
Bank Growth

100%	of	
Divisional 
PBT target 
achieved(2)

1.	 Adjusted	Return	on	Equity	excludes	gross	margin	from	the	sale	of	ground	rents.

2.	 	Divisional	PBT	performance	condition	for	the	Divisional	Directors	–	the	percentage	achievement	of	target	is	shown	as	the	average	performance	for	each	

Division.

The	Committee	is	satisfied	that	there	is	strong	alignment	between	Company	performance	and	the	remuneration	of	the	Executive	
Directors.	As	a	result	of	strong	performance	during	the	year,	the	Committee	determined	that	the	Executive	Directors	would	receive	
bonus	payments	equal	to	100%	of	their	maximum	bonus	potential	as	set	at	the	start	of	the	year.	N	G	Simpkin	was	not	entitled	to	receive	
a bonus for the year ending 30 April 2015. 

Further	details	are	set	out	in	the	Annual	Report	on	Remuneration	on	pages	74	to	76.

Other remuneration outcomes during the year
50%	of	the	awards	granted	under	the	2009	LTIP	Part	B	vested	on	15	April	2015.	These	awards	vested	following	the	achievement	of	the	
Net	Assets	per	share	performance	condition	underpin	of	£9.00.	Actual	Net	Assets	per	share	were	£11.97	as	at	April	2015.	

Shareholder	approval	was	received	at	the	2011	AGM	to	amend	the	rules	of	the	2009	LTIP	Part	B	so	that	the	terms	of	existing	options	
granted	can	be	adjusted	in	the	event	of	the	payment	of	a	cash	dividend	or	dividend	in	specie.	The	exercise	price	of	the	2009	LTIP	Part	B	
awards	at	the	date	of	vesting	was	£4.96	following	£3.44	of	dividends	being	paid	during	the	vesting	period.	Full	details	are	disclosed	on	
page	77.	

New appointment during the year
R	J	Stearn	was	appointed	Group	Finance	Director	on	13	April	2015.	In	line	with	our	recruitment	remuneration	policy	R	J	Stearn’s	
remuneration package is made up of: 

•	 Base	salary	equal	to	£350,000	per	annum	from	the	date	of	appointment.

•	 Standard	benefits	package	and	a	pension	contribution	of	15%	of	salary.	

•	 Maximum	bonus	opportunity	of	200%	of	salary	for	the	financial	year	ending	30	April	2016.

•	 	A	buy-out	package	for	incentives	foregone	in	respect	of	his	role	at	Quintain	Estates	and	Development	plc,	and	awards	under	the	
2011 LTIP. In line with the Company’s recruitment policy, when determining the package the Committee considered the structure 
of	Quintain’s	incentive	arrangements,	the	proportion	of	the	relevant	performance	periods	completed,	the	associated	performance	
conditions	and	the	likelihood	of	vesting.	Further	details	of	the	buy-out	package	granted	on	13	April	2015	and	awards	to	be	granted	
under	the	2011	LTIP	can	be	found	on	page	78.

69

02_BERKAR15_DirRemReport_66-87NEW.indd   69

14/07/2015   10:45

berkeley AnnuAl report 2015  /  governAnceStrategic reportgovernanceFinancialSDirectors’ Remuneration Report
continued

Single total figure of Remuneration for Executive Directors for 2014/15
The table below summarises the 2014/15 single total figure of remuneration:

Executive Director 
£’000

Salary

Benefits Annual bonus

Multi-year 
performance 
incentive(1)

Pensions

Other(2)

A	W	Pidgley

R C Perrins

R	J	Stearn

N	G	Simpkin(3)

G	J	Fry

K	Whiteman

S Ellis

825

500

19

119

344

324

324

48

31

1

8

26

30

20

2,475

1,500

–

–

602

567

713

19,808

10,241

–

–

6,281

3,427

2,646

140

85

3

18

52

49

49

–

–

1,609

–

–

–

–

Total

23,296

12,357

1,632

145

7,305

4,397

3,752

Notes
1.	 	2014/15	Multi-year	performance	incentive	–	the	amounts	relate	to	awards	that	were	released	under	the	Bonus	Plan	and	the	2009	Part	B	LTIP	awards	that	

vested in 2014/15.

2.  Buy out compensation awarded on joining Berkeley on 13 April 2015 (cash payment and conditional shares granted on 13 April 2015).
3.	 Left	the	Board	on	8	September	2014.

Total equity exposure at 30 April 2015
The	following	table	and	chart	sets	out	all	subsisting	interests	in	the	equity	of	the	Company	held	by	the	Executive	Directors	at	30	April	
2015:

Scheme interests – Options and awards over shares

Executive Director

Shares

2009 LTIP Part B

A	W	Pidgley

R C Perrins

R	J	Stearn

G	J	Fry

K	Whiteman

S Ellis

6,368,153

1,461,792

3,867

1,243,056

80,560

57,029

750,000

375,000

–

250,000

125,000

87,500

Notes
1.  Buy out conditional shares awared on joining Berkeley on 13 April 2015.

Option interests subject to conditions

Other share 
awards subject to 
conditions(1) 

Total Interests 
held

2011 LTIP

5,000,000

5,000,000

–

–

–

45,672

1,866,503

1,000,000

2,250,000

–

–

–

5,750,000

5,375,000

45,672

2,116,503

1,125,000

2,337,500

200

9,102

9,951

K Whiteman (% of salary)

200

626

5,605

R J Stearn (% of salary)

S Ellis (% of salary)

200

28

329

200

443

11,401

Value/gain on interests over shares (unvested)

70

02_BERKAR15_DirRemReport_66-87NEW.indd   70

14/07/2015   10:45

berkeley AnnuAl report 2015  /  governAnceA W Pidgley (% of salary)R C Perrins (% of salary)2007,36517,14740019,44411,312G J Fry (% of salary)Shareholding requirementKey: Value of beneficially owned sharesStatement of implementation of remuneration policy in the following financial year 
Executive Directors
The remuneration policy and its implementation for the forthcoming financial year is summarised below.

Salary: The salaries for 2015/16 are set out below:

Executive Director

2014/15 Salary 
£’000

2015/16 Salary 
£’000

% change

FTSE 250 - £’000

Lower Quartile

Median 

Upper Quartile

A	W	Pidgley

R C Perrins

R	J	Stearn

G	J	Fry

K	Whiteman

S Ellis

825

500

350

344

324

324

850

515

350

355

335

335

3.0

3.0

–

3.2

3.4

3.4

459

461

307

295

295

295

524

526

344

340

340

340

607

605

399

390

390

390

In	reviewing	the	salaries	of	the	Executive	Directors	for	2015/16,	the	Committee	has	also	taken	account	of	the	employment	conditions	and	
salary	increases	awarded	to	employees	throughout	the	Group,	which	were	on	average	5.2%.

Benefits and Pension:	No	changes	are	proposed	benefits	or	pension	in	2015/16.	

Bonus Plan:	The	maximum	bonus	potentials	for	the	year	ending	30	April	2016	(first	year	of	operation	of	the	new	Bonus	Plan	approved	
by shareholders at the 2014 AGM) are set out below:

Executive Director

A W Pidgley

R C Perrins

R J Stearn

G J Fry

K Whiteman

Maximum	Bonus	(%	
of salary)

300%

300%

200%

175%

200%

S Ellis

220%

The	Committee	has	approved	an	increase	in	K	Whiteman’s	maximum	bonus	potential	for	2015/16,	from	175%	to	200%,	reflecting	his	
performance and contribution to the business.

The	bonus	payable	to	each	of	the	Group	Chairman,	Group	Managing	Director	and	Group	Finance	Director	will	be	determined	by	
reference	to	the	Group	performance	conditions.	For	the	Divisional	Directors,	50%	of	the	potential	bonus	payable	will	be	determined	by	
reference	to	the	Group	performance	condition	and	50%	by	reference	to	the	Divisional	performance	condition.

Group performance condition (year ending 30 April 2016)

Performance Requirement Matrix

<0%

0.0%

0.0%

50.0%

y
t
i
u
q
E
n
o
n
r
u
t
e
R

<20.0%

20.0%

21.0%

22.0%

23.0%

24.0%

25.0%

0%

50%

60%

70%

80%

90%

100%

Bonus Plan 
Deduction

0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

25%

30%

35%

40%

45%

50%

Net Asset Value Growth

1.0%

60%

0%

30%

36%

42%

48%

54%

60%

2.0%

70.0%

3.0%

80.0%

4.0%

5.0%

90.0%

100.0%

0%

35%

42%

49%

56%

63%

70%

0%

40%

48%

56%

64%

72%

80%

0%

45%

54%

63%

72%

81%

90%

0%

50%

60%

70%

80%

90%

100%

Divisional performance condition (year ending 30 April 2016)
The Divisional performance targets are set at the beginning of the financial year, based upon the business plan, including PBT targets of 
the relevant division, at a level which is challenging taking into account the potential level of bonus payments, the market, development 
availability and other relevant issues. It is the view of the Committee that the disclosure of these targets in advance would provide the 
Company’s competitors with an unfair advantage. However the Committee may in the future provide retrospective disclosure to allow 
shareholders to judge the level of bonus actually earned against the relevant Division’s performance.

Long-term incentives: No	changes	are	proposed	to	the	Company’s	long-term	incentive	arrangements	in	2015/16.	

71

02_BERKAR15_DirRemReport_66-87NEW.indd   71

14/07/2015   10:45

berkeley AnnuAl report 2015  /  governAnceStrategic reportgovernanceFinancialS 
 
Directors’ Remuneration Report
continued

Impact of the new UK Corporate Governance Code
The	Committee	is	comfortable	that	its	Policy	is	in	line	with	the	new	UK	Corporate	Governance	Code	(applying	for	financial	years	
beginning on or after 1 October 2014 which the Company will apply with effect from the year ending 30 April 2016). The following table 
sets	out	the	key	elements	of	the	revised	Code	and	how	the	Company’s	remuneration	policy	for	Executive	Directors	is	in	line	with	the	
Governance Code:

Code Provision

Company Remuneration Policy

Executive Directors’ remuneration 
should be designed to promote the 
long-term success of the Company.

Incentive Schemes should include 
provisions that would enable the 
company to recover sums paid or 
withhold the payment of any sum, 
and specify the circumstances in 
which it would be appropriate to 
do so.

For share-based remuneration, the 
Remuneration Committee should 
consider requiring directors to hold 
a minimum number of shares and 
to hold shares for a further period 
after vesting or exercise, including 
for a period after leaving the 
company, subject to the need to 
finance any costs of acquisition and 
associated tax liabilities.

The 2014 Bonus Plan provides a rolling deferral in shares and an ongoing performance based risk 
adjustment. In addition, the end of the rolling deferral period is 6 years.

The	2011	LTIP	performance	period	does	not	finish	until	2021	providing	a	very	long-term	equity	based	
incentive plan. 

It is the Committee’s view that the 2014 Bonus Plan and 2011 LTIP together provide a holistic approach 
to	ensuring	Executive	Directors	are	focused	on	the	long-term	success	of	the	Company.

The	2014	Bonus	Plan	and	new	grants*	under	the	2011	LTIP	include	best	practice	malus	and	clawback	
provisions. The circumstances in which malus and clawback could apply are as follows:

•	 	discovery	of	a	material	misstatement	resulting	in	an	adjustment	in	the	audited	consolidated	accounts	

of	the	Company;

•	 	the	assessment	of	any	performance	target	or	condition	in	respect	of	an	award	was	based	on	error,	or	

inaccurate	or	misleading	information;	

•	 	the	discovery	that	any	information	used	to	determine	the	number	of	shares	subject	to	an	award	was	

based	on	error,	or	inaccurate	or	misleading	information;	

•	 	action	or	conduct	of	an	award	holder	which,	in	the	reasonable	opinion	of	the	Board,	amounts	to	

employee	misbehaviour,	fraud	or	gross	misconduct;	

•	 	events	or	behaviour	of	an	award	holder	have	led	to	the	censure	of	the	Company	by	a	regulatory	
authority or have had a significant detrimental impact on the reputation of any Group Company 
provided that the Board is satisfied that the relevant award holder was responsible for the censure or 
reputational damage and that the censure or reputational damage is attributable to him.

The 2014 Bonus Plan has a malus period finishing on the date of each payment under the Plan with a 
clawback	period	extending	for	a	further	three	years	following	each	payment.

The	2011	LTIP*	has	a	malus	period	extending	to	the	end	of	the	Plan	period	in	2021	with	a	clawback	
period	extending	for	a	further	two	years.

The Committee believes that the rules of the Plans provide sufficient powers to enforce malus and 
clawback	if	required.

*		The	new	malus	and	clawback	provisions	in	the	2011	LTIP	will	only	apply	to	grants	where	the	grant	or	
the commitment to make the grant is made after the Committee determined to amend the rules of 
the	2011	LTIP	on	15	June	2015.

The policy contains the following relevant features:

•	 	Minimum	shareholding	requirement	of	200%	of	salary	for	Executive	Directors	with	the	Executive	

Chairman	having	a	400%	of	salary	requirement;

•	 	The	Committee	believes	that	the	long-term	nature	of	both	the	2014	Bonus	Plan	(6	years)	and	2011	

LTIP	(10	years)	means	that	there	is	no	requirement	for	additional	holding	periods.

The Committee, therefore, believes that its Policy is in line with best practice.

02_BERKAR15_DirRemReport_66-87NEW.indd   72

14/07/2015   10:45

72

berkeley AnnuAl report 2015  /  governAnceNon-executive Directors
The	following	table	sets	out	the	fee	rates	for	the	Non-executive	Directors	in	the	year	ended	30	April	2015	and	those	rates	which	will	
apply in the year ending 30 April 2016:

Non-executive Director

Deputy Chairman and SID fees

Basic	Fee

Additional fee for chairmanship of Audit and Remuneration Committee

2014/15 
£’000

106.0

58.5

12.5

2015/16 
£’000

109.25

60.25

12.5

% change

3.1

3.0

–

In	reviewing	the	fees	of	the	Non-executive	Directors	for	2015/16,	the	Committee	has	also	taken	account	of	the	employment	conditions	
and	salary	increases	awarded	to	employees	throughout	the	Group,	which	were	on	average	5.2%.	

Annual report on remuneration
This section of the Remuneration Report contains details of how the Company’s 2014/15 remuneration policy for Directors was 
implemented during the financial year that ended on 30 April 2015. An advisory resolution to approve this report will be put to 
shareholders at the AGM.

Single total figure of remuneration (Audited)
The	table	below	sets	out	the	single	total	figure	of	remuneration	and	breakdown	for	each	Executive	Director	paid	in	the	2014/15	financial	
year. Comparative figures for 2013/14 have also been provided.

Executive 
Director 
(£’000)

A	W	Pidgley

R C Perrins

R	J	Stearn

N	G	Simpkin(5)

G	J	Fry

K	Whiteman

S Ellis

Salary

Benefits(1)

Annual bonus

Multi-year 
performance 
incentive

Pensions

Other(4)

Total

2015

2014

2015

2014

2015

2014

2015(2)

2014(3)

2015

2014

2015

2014

2015

2014

825

500

19

119

344

324

324

800

484

–

321

334

314

314

48

31

1

8

26

30

20

47

32

–

23

28

24

27

2,475

1,200

19,808

1,500

726

10,241

–

–

602

567

713

–

353

292

275

275

–

–

6,281

3,427

2,646

1,574

947

–

424

359

294

333

140

85

3

18

52

49

49

136

82

–

–

–

1,609

48

50

47

47

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

23,296

3,757

12,357

2,271

1,632

–

145

1,169

7,305

1,063

4,397

3,752

954

996

Notes
1.	 Benefits	include	a	fully	expensed	company	car	or	cash	allowance	alternative	and	medical	insurance.
2.	 	2014/15	Multi-year	performance	incentive	–	the	amounts	relate	to	awards	that	were	released	under	the	Bonus	Plan	and	the	2009	Part	B	LTIP	awards	that	

vested in 2014/15.

3.	 2013/14	Multi-year	performance	incentive	–	the	amounts	relate	to	awards	that	were	released	under	the	Bonus	Plan.
4.		Other	–	this	represents	buy	out	compensation	awarded	to	R	J	Stearn	on	joining	Berkeley	on	13	April	2015	(cash	payment	and	conditional	shares	granted	

on	13	April	2015)	–	see	page	78	for	details.

5.	 Left	the	Board	on	8	September	2014.	

02_BERKAR15_DirRemReport_66-87NEW.indd   73

14/07/2015   10:45

73

berkeley AnnuAl report 2015  /  governAnceStrategic reportgovernanceFinancialSDirectors’ Remuneration Report
continued

The	table	below	sets	out	the	single	total	figure	of	remuneration	and	breakdown	for	each	Non-executive	Director.

Non-Executive Director 
(£’000)

J	Armitt

D Howell (1)

A	Nimmo

G Barker

V	Wadley

A Li 

A Myers 

D Brightmore-Armour(2)

                            Basic fees

                       Additional fees(3)

                            Total fees

2015

106.0

19.8

58.5

58.5

58.5

58.5

58.5

58.5

2014

103.0

56.5

56.5

56.5

56.5

38.0

23.0

–

2015

2014

–

4.2

–

12.5

–

–

8.3

–

–

12.5

–

12.5

–

–

–

–

2015

106.0

24.0

58.5

71.0

58.5

58.5

66.8

58.5

2014

103.0

69.0

56.5

69.0

56.5

38.0

23.0

–

Notes
1.  Resigned from the Board on 1 September 2014.
2.  Appointed to the Board on 1 May 2014.
3.  Additional fees represent fees paid for the role of Committee Chairmanship.
4.	Non-executive	Directors	do	not	participate	in	any	of	the	Company’s	incentive	arrangements	nor	do	they	receive	benefits.

Additional details in respect of single total figure table (Audited)
Taxable benefits
Taxable	benefits	comprise	a	fully	expensed	company	car	or	cash	allowance	alternative	and	medical	insurance.

Annual Bonus
In	respect	of	the	year	under	review,	the	Executive	Directors’	performance	was	carefully	reviewed	by	the	Committee	and	performance	
against the Bonus Plan targets is summarised below:

Maximum Annual 
Bonus

Weighting - % of 
maximum paid for 
Group Performance

Weighting - % of 
maximum paid 
for Divisional 
Performance

Annual Bonus 
Contribution to 
Plan Account for 
2014/15 £’000

300%

300%

175%

175%

220%

100%

100%

50%

50%

50%

0%

0%

50%

50%

50%

2,475

1,500

602

567

713

Annual Bonus 
Contribution to 
Plan Account for 
2014/15 
% of maximum

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

Executive Director

A	W	Pidgley

R C Perrins

G	J	Fry

K	Whiteman

S Ellis

Notes
1.	 N	G	Simpkin	was	not	entitled	to	receive	a	bonus	for	the	year	ended	30	April	2015.	

02_BERKAR15_DirRemReport_66-87NEW.indd   74

14/07/2015   10:45

74

berkeley AnnuAl report 2015  /  governAnceAssessment of Group performance condition
The	matrix	of	targets	against	which	performance	has	been	assessed	for	the	year	ended	30	April	2015	is	set	out	below:	

Performance Requirement Matrix

<0%

0.0%

0.0%

50.0%

y
t
i
u
q
E
n
o
n
r
u
t
e
R

<20.0%

20.0%

21.0%

22.0%

23.0%

24.0%

25.0%

0%

50%

60%

70%

80%

90%

100%

Bonus Plan 
Deduction

0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

0%

25%

30%

35%

40%

45%

50%

Land Bank Growth

1.0%

60%

0%

30%

36%

42%

48%

54%

60%

2.0%

70.0%

3.0%

80.0%

4.0%

5.0%

90.0%

100.0%

0%

35%

42%

49%

56%

63%

70%

0%

40%

48%

56%

64%

72%

80%

0%

45%

54%

63%

72%

81%

90%

0%

50%

60%

70%

80%

90%

100%

Notes
1.	 	The	matrix	shows	the	percentage	of	each	of	the	performance	requirements	for	a	given	level	of	performance	and	the	corresponding	percentage	of	the	

targeted	maximum	annual	bonus	potential	that	could	be	earned	for	2014/15.

2.  Straight line bonus vesting between points.
3.	 Return	on	Equity	(ROE)	is	defined	as	profit	before	tax	divided	by	average	shareholders’	funds.
4. Land Bank Growth is defined as the annual percentage increase in the development margin in the land bank.

Actual	performance	against	the	maximum	targets	for	2014/15	is	set	out	below,	along	with	the	targets	and	actual	performance	for	the	
preceding four years of the five year plan:

Return on Equity

Land Bank Growth

Bonus Plan year

Maximum Target

2014/15

2013/14

2012/13

2011/12

2010/11

25.0%

20.0%

18.5%

16.5%

13.5%

Actual

29.5%*

27.5%

22.4%

21.2%

15.3%

Maximum Target

5.0%

5.0%

10.0%

8.0%

10.0%

Actual

16.8%**

5.7%

10.5%

12.0%

13.1%

*	 Adjusted	ROE	for	the	year	ended	30	April	2015	excludes	gross	margin	from	the	sale	of	ground	rents
**	 	The	land	bank	has	been	rebased	to	include	the	pipeline	that	was	previously	disclosed	separately.	Land	bank	growth,	if	calculated	on	a	similar	basis	to	last	

year,	was	25.7%

For	the	2014/15	financial	year,	the	annual	Bonus	Plan	contribution	based	on	performance	against	the	Group	performance	targets	matrix	
equated	to	100%	of	the	maximum	annual	bonus	subject	to	this	condition.

Assessment of Divisional PBT performance condition

Percentage of bonus 
element paid for 
threshold performance

Percentage of bonus 
element paid for 
maximum performance

Level of actual 
performance as a 
percentage of the 
maximum performance 
target

Percentage of bonus 
element earned 
following assessment 
against the performance 
target

0%

0%

0%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

Division

St George 

Berkeley Homes East 
Thames

St	James	Group

The Divisional PBT targets are set at the beginning of the financial year at a level which is challenging taking into account the potential 
level of bonus payments, the market, development availability and other relevant issues. Disclosure of PBT targets are considered to be 
commercially sensitive as the disclosure of such details could be detrimental to the Company’s future strategic plans.

02_BERKAR15_DirRemReport_66-87NEW.indd   75

14/07/2015   10:45

75

berkeley AnnuAl report 2015  /  governAnceStrategic reportgovernanceFinancialS 
 
Directors’ Remuneration Report
continued

For	the	2014/15	financial	year,	the	annual	Bonus	Plan	contribution	based	on	performance	against	the	Divisional	PBT	targets	equated	to	
100%	of	maximum	annual	bonus	subject	to	this	condition.

The	Committee	exercised	no	discretion	in	determining	incentive	outcomes	for	the	year	ended	30	April	2015.

Bonus earned but deferred under the Bonus Plan
Under the Bonus Plan, the earned bonus for the year is added to each individual Director’s plan account. On the basis that this is the 
final	year	of	the	2011	Bonus	Plan,	in	line	with	the	Plan	rules,	100%	of	the	balance	of	the	plan	account	at	the	end	of	the	financial	year	is	
released.

The	plan	account	for	each	Executive	Director	is	set	out	below.

a. Plan 
account 
brought 
forward

b. Plan 
account 
brought 
forward(1)

Shares

120,912

72,948

28,398

24,801

26,505

£’000

3,263

1,969

766

669

715

£’000

2,475

1,500

602

567

713

Executive 
Director

A	W	Pidgley

R C Perrins

G	J	Fry

K	Whiteman

S Ellis

Total

c. 
Contribution 
into plan 
account for 
the financial 
year 2014/15

d. Plan 
account 
balance 
following 
contribution 
for financial 
year 2014/15

e. Amount 
released 
following 
contribution 
for financial 
year 
2014/15(3)

f. Amount 
released 
- annual 
bonus 
(100% of 
column c)

g. Amount 
released - 
Multi-year 
(column e 
less column 
f)

h. Plan 
account 
carried 
forward

£’000

£’000

£’000

£’000

£’000

5,738

3,469

1,368

1,236

1,428

5,738

3,469

1,368

1,236

1,428

2,475

1,500

602

567

713

3,263

1,969

766

669

715

–

–

–

–

–

–

273,564

7,382

5,857

13,239

13,239

5,857

7,382

Notes
1.	 Converted	at	a	share	price	of	£25.19	at	30	April	2015	plus	£0.90	dividend	paid	26	September	2014	plus	£0.90	dividend	paid	23	January	2015.
2.	 	N	G	Simpkin	was	not	entitled	to	receive	a	bonus	for	the	year	ended	30	April	2015.	The	balance	of	his	plan	account	brought	forward	from	the	year	ended	

30	April	2014	(£777,000)	lapsed	following	notice	of	termination	of	employment.

3.	 	50%	of	the	amount	released	following	the	contribution	for	the	financial	year	2014/15	is	payable	in	cash,	and	50%	in	shares,	as	set	out	in	the	table	below.	

The	shares	released	have	been	converted	using	a	share	price	of	£25.19	at	30	April	2015:

Executive Director

A	W	Pidgley

R C Perrins

G	J	Fry

K	Whiteman

S Ellis

Total

Amount released

Amount released in cash 
(50%)

Amount released in 
shares (50%)

Number of shares 
released

£’000

5,738

3,469

1,368

1,236

1,428

13,239

£’000

2,869

1,734

684

618

714

6,619

£’000

2,869

1,734

684

618

714

6,619

Number

113,903

68,854

27,163

24,541

28,348

262,809

02_BERKAR15_DirRemReport_66-87NEW.indd   76

14/07/2015   10:45

76

berkeley AnnuAl report 2015  /  governAnceLong-term incentives
50%	of	the	Part	B	awards	granted	under	the	2009	Long	Term	Incentive	Plan	vested	on	15	April	2015.	The	table	below	sets	out	the	
numbers	of	awards	that	vested	for	each	Executive	Director	participant	and	the	achievement	against	the	conditions	required	for	vesting.	

The	table	also	sets	out	the	remaining	50%	of	the	2009	LTIP	Part	B	awards	which	will	vest	on	the	15	April	2016	provided	that	the	
Executive	remains	in	employment	and	the	satisfaction	of	the	Net	Assets	per	share	underpin	condition	is	achieved	at	the	vesting	date	
(£9.00	at	15	April	2016).	Should	these	awards	vest,	the	value	at	vesting	will	be	disclosed	in	the	2015/16	single	total	figure	of	remuneration.

Number 
of awards 
granted 
(50% of 
the 2009 
LTIP Part B 
awards)(1)

Executive 
Director

Performance 
measures

Performance 
outcome

Percentage 
of awards 
vesting

Number 
of awards 
vesting 
(50% of 
the 2009 
LTIP Part B 
awards)

Value of 
awards that 
vested on 15 
April 2015 
(£’000)(2)

Number 
of awards 
that will 
potentially 
vest on 15 
April 2016 
(50% of 
the 2009 
LTIP Part B 
awards)(3)

A	W	Pidgley

750,000	 Continued 

R C Perrins

375,000	

G	J	Fry

250,000 

K	Whiteman

125,000 

S Ellis

87,500

employment to the 
vesting date and the 
satisfaction of the 
underpin condition 
that	Net	Assets	per	
share are at least 
£9.00	at	15	April	2015	

Achieved	–	Net	
Assets per share of 
£11.97	at	April	2015

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

750,000	

16,545

750,000	

375,000	

250,000 

125,000 

87,500	

8,273

5,515

2,758

1,930

375,000	

250,000 

125,000 

87,500	

Notes
1.	 	The	original	exercise	price	was	adjusted	from	£8.40	to	£4.96	to	reflect	the	payment	of	dividends	during	the	vesting	period	–	as	approved	by	shareholders	

at the 2011 AGM.

2.	 	The	value	of	awards	at	vesting	is	calculated	using	the	closing	middle	market	share	price	of	£27.02	on	15	April	2015,	the	date	the	awards	became	

exercisable,	less	the	exercise	price	of	£4.96	per	share.

3.	 	The	value	at	vesting	will	be	dependent	upon	the	share	price	and	exercise	price	at	15	April	2016.
4.	N	G	Simpkin’s	2009	LTIP	Part	B	awards	lapsed	following	notice	of	termination	of	employment.
5.	 The	accounting	for	the	2009	B	LTIP	is	disclosed	in	Note	6	to	the	financial	statements.

The	above	participants	exercised	their	vested	awards	on	the	15	April	2015.

Total pension entitlements (Audited)
No	Executive	Directors	participate	in	any	defined	benefit	arrangements.	

Sean	Ellis	and	Richard	Stearn	are	members	of	a	defined	contribution	scheme.	They	received	contributions	equal	to	15%	of	salary.	

No	amounts	were	paid	into	pension	arrangements	in	respect	of	Tony	Pidgley,	Rob	Perrins,	Greg	Fry	and	Karl	Whiteman	during	
the year ended 30 April 2015, who instead received payments in lieu of a pension contribution from the Company (2014/15: 
percentages	of	salary	17%,	17%,	15%	and	15%	respectively).	

02_BERKAR15_DirRemReport_66-87NEW.indd   77

14/07/2015   10:45

77

berkeley AnnuAl report 2015  /  governAnceStrategic reportgovernanceFinancialSDirectors’ Remuneration Report
continued

Replacement awards made to R J Stearn (Audited) 
In	line	with	Berkeley’s	recruitment	policy,	on	appointment	to	the	role	as	Group	Finance	Director,	R	J	Stearn	was	granted	
replacement	share	awards	over	45,672	Berkeley	shares	on	13	April	2015	and	provided	with	a	cash	payment	of	£359,842	in	lieu	of	
his	entitlement	over	Quintain	incentives	that	were	forfeited	when	he	joined	Berkeley.	

Further	details	of	the	conditional	shares	granted	in	the	year	are	provided	below:

Type of award

Conditional shares

Conditional shares

Number of 
awards

Face value of 
awards made(1)

16,195

11,848

£442,933

£324,043

Date of vesting

Conditions

23 May 2016

Continued employment

22	July	2016

Continued employment to vesting date and sale 
restriction	until	22	July	2018

Conditional shares

8,795

£240,543

23	May	2017

Conditional shares

8,834

£241,610

23	May	2018

Continued employment to vesting date and sale 
restriction	until	23	May	2019

Continued employment to vesting date and sale 
restriction until 23 May 2020

Notes
1.	 	At	the	time	of	recruitment	the	total	value	of	R	J	Stearn’s	buy-out	shares	was	determined	to	be	£1,014,832.	This	was	converted	into	replacement	share	
awards	over	45,672	Berkeley	shares	using	a	share	price	of	£22.22.	In	line	with	the	regulations,	the	face	value	of	the	replacement	shares	was	calculated	
using	the	closing	middle	market	share	price	of	£27.35	on	13	April	2015,	the	date	of	joining	Berkeley	and	the	date	the	awards	were	granted.

In	addition,	in	accordance	with	the	Company’s	recruitment	policy,	R	J	Stearn	will	be	granted	704,328	options	over	shares	under	the	2011	
LTIP following the announcement of the results for the year ended 30 April 2015. A further 250,000 options over shares will be granted 
to him following the first anniversary of commencement of employment.

Type of award

Number of 
awards

Date of grant

Date of vesting

Conditions

704,328

Following	announcement	of	results	
for year ended 30 April 2015

2011	LTIP	–	Options

30 September 
2021

250,000

Following	the	first	anniversary	of	
commencement of employment

Performance will be measured against 
cumulative distribution targets. All awards 
granted to participants in the 2011 LTIP have 
the same performance conditions.

See detailed terms on pages 62 to 63 of 
the Directors’ Remuneration Policy at  
www.berkeleygroup.co.uk/investor-
information/corporate-governance.

Payments to past Directors (Audited)
No	payments	to	past	Directors	were	made	during	the	year.

Payments for loss of office (Audited)
N	G	Simpkin	received	twelve	months’	notice	of	termination	of	his	employment	on	24	September	2014.	N	G	Simpkin	is	on	gardening	
leave	and	during	this	period	will	receive	his	salary	and	benefits,	including	pension	contributions,	totalling	£452,427,	as	follows:

N G Simpkin

Salary

Benefits

Pension

Total

Payments for 12 months’ notice 
£’000

335 

67	

50 

452

N	G	Simpkin	was	not	entitled	to	receive	a	bonus	for	the	year	ended	30	April	2015.	The	balance	of	his	Bonus	Plan	account	brought	
forward	from	the	year	ending	30	April	2014	and	his	2009	LTIP	Part	B	and	2011	LTIP	awards	lapsed	following	notice	of	termination	of	
employment.

N	G	Simpkin	has	issued	legal	proceedings	against	the	Company	arising	from	his	employment	and	its	termination.	These	proceedings	
were	received	by	the	Company	on	12	December	2014	and	25	June	2015.	The	Company	is	defending	the	proceedings	with	the	assistance	
of	external	legal	advisers.

02_BERKAR15_DirRemReport_66-87NEW.indd   78

14/07/2015   10:45

78

berkeley AnnuAl report 2015  /  governAnceDirectors’ shareholding and share interests (Audited)
The	Company	has	a	shareholding	requirement	for	both	Executive	and	Non-executive	Directors,	linked	to	base	salary	or	net	fee	they	
receive	from	the	Company.	In	the	case	of	the	Group	Chairman	this	is	400%	of	base	salary,	for	other	Executive	Directors	200%	of	base	
salary	and	for	the	Non-executive	Directors	100%	of	net	fees.	This	should	be	achieved	within	five	years	of	appointment	for	Executive	
Directors	and	three	years	of	appointment	for	Non-executive	Directors.

Using	the	Company’s	closing	share	price	of	£25.19	on	30	April	2015,	compliance	with	these	requirements	was	as	follows:

Obligation  
(% base salary/NED net fees)

% base salary/NED net fees at  
30 April 2015

Achievement at 30 April 2015

Executive Director

A	W	Pidgley

R C Perrins

R	J	Stearn

G	J	Fry

K	Whiteman

S Ellis

Non-executive

J	Armitt

A	Nimmo

G Barker

V	Wadley

A Li

A Myers

D Brightmore-Armour

Notes
1.  To be achieved within 5 years of appointment.
2.  To be achieved within 3 years of appointment.

19,444%

7,365%

28%

9,102%

626%

443%

373%

297%

614%

483%

742%

40%

–

√

√

x	(1)

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

x	(2)

x	(2)

400%

200%

200%

200%

200%

200%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

79

02_BERKAR15_DirRemReport_66-87NEW.indd   79

14/07/2015   10:45

berkeley AnnuAl report 2015  /  governAnceStrategic reportgovernanceFinancialS 
Directors’ Remuneration Report
continued

The table below summarises the Directors’ interests in shares at 30 April 2015.

Scheme interests – Options and awards over shares

Option interests subject to conditions(3)

Executive Director

Shares(1)

2009 LTIP Part B(4)

A	W	Pidgley

R C Perrins

R	J	Stearn

N	G	Simpkin(2)

G	J	Fry

K	Whiteman

S Ellis

Non-executive

J	Armitt

A	Nimmo

G Barker

V	Wadley

A Li 

A Myers 

D Brightmore-Armour

6,368,153

1,461,792

3,867

27,000

1,243,056

80,560

57,029

9,1 1 2

4,000

10,042

6,500

10,000

650

–

750,000

375,000

–

–

250,000

125,000

87,500

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

2011 LTIP(5)

5,000,000

5,000,000

–

–

1,866,503

1,000,000

2,250,000

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

Other share 
awards subject to 
conditions(6) 

Total Interests held 
at 30 April 2015

–

–

45,672

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

5,750,000

5,375,000

45,672

–

2,116,503

1,125,000

2,337,500

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

Notes
1.  Beneficial interests include shares held directly or indirectly by connected persons.
2.	 At	8	September	2014	–	N	G	Simpkin’s	2011	LTIP	and	2009	LTIP	Part	B	awards	lapsed	on	notice	of	termination	of	employment.
3.	 	Please	see	the	description	of	2009	LTIP	Part	B	awards	and	2011	LTIP	awards	in	the	‘elements	of	previous	policy	that	continue	to	apply’	section	 

of the Directors’ Remuneration Policy on pages 61 to 63, which is available to view in full on the Company’s website at  
www.berkeleygroup.co.uk/investor-information/corporate-governance.

4.	2009	LTIP	Part	B	option	exercise	price	£4.96	at	30	April	2015.
5.	 2011	LTIP	option	exercise	price	£9.56	at	30	April	2015.
6.	 Other	share	awards	subject	to	conditions	relate	to	the	buy	out	conditional	shares	awared	to	R	J	Stearn	on	joining	Berkeley	on	13	April	2015.

50%	of	the	2009	LTIP	Part	B	awards	vested	and	were	exercised	during	the	year	by	the	Executive	Director	participants.	See	the	long-
term	incentives	section	under	the	additional	details	in	respect	of	single	total	figure	table	on	page	77	for	details.	

Dilution  
The	2009	LTIP	and	2011	LTIP	were	special	arrangements,	approved	by	shareholders	at	the	EGM	in	April	2009	and	AGM	in	September	
2011 respectively. In considering dilution under the 2011 LTIP the Committee took account of the long term nature of the plan which 
extends	beyond	the	length	of	normal	incentive	plans.

In	addition,	the	Committee	took	into	account,	after	the	priority	return	of	£1.7	billion	(£13	per	share),	representing	183%	of	Net	Assets	at	
30	April	2011,	that	the	dilution	on	existing	shareholders	until	the	hurdle	return	has	been	achieved	will	have	no	effect	and	the	dilution	will	
only	have	effect	on	the	value	created	above	the	priority	return	of	£1.7	billion.

02_BERKAR15_DirRemReport_66-87NEW.indd   80

14/07/2015   10:45

80

berkeley AnnuAl report 2015  /  governAncePerformance and pay
The graph below shows the Company’s performance, measured by total shareholder return (TSR), compared with the performance of 
the	FTSE	250	and	the	FTSE	All	Share.	The	Company	considers	these	the	most	relevant	indices	for	total	shareholder	return	disclosure	
required	under	these	Regulations.

Total shareholder return from 30 April 2009 (%)

300

250

200

150

100

50

0
2009

2010

2011

2012

2013

2014

2015

Berkeley Group 
Holdings plc

FTSE 250 Index

FTSE All Share Index

Notes
1.   Total shareholder return (“TSR”) is a measure showing the return on investing in one share of the Company over the measurement period (the return is 

the value of the capital gain and reinvested dividends). This calculation is then carried out for the relevant indices.

Group Chairman and Managing Director remuneration over past 6 years
The table below shows the remuneration of the Group Chairman and Managing Director for each of the financial years shown above. 
Given	the	nature	of	the	roles	of	A	W	Pidgley	and	R	C	Perrins,	the	table	below	provides	this	information	for	both	individuals.

Single figure of total remuneration (£’000)(1)

Executive Director

A W Pidgley 
Group Chairman

R C Perrins  
Managing Director

Annual bonus pay-out  
(as % maximum 
opportunity)(2)

Multi-year incentive 
vesting awards (as % 
maximum opportunity)

2014/15

2013/14

2012/13

2011/12

2010/11

2009/10

23,296

3,757

3,638

2,799

2,033

2,406

12,357

2,271

2,198

1,692

1,226

1,127

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%/See	Note	4

See	Note	3

n/a

n/a

Notes
1.  Single figure of total remuneration for each year has been calculated in accordance with the Regulations.
2.	 From	2010/11	onwards	the	annual	bonus	pay-out	figures	represent	annual	Company	contributions	under	the	Bonus	Plan.
3.   2011/12, 2012/13 and 2013/14 Multi-year vesting awards represent deferred awards that were released during the year under the Bonus Plan. In accordance 
with the Bonus Plan rules the Company’s contribution is earned based on the satisfaction of the annual performance conditions. Part of the Company 
contribution	is	provided	as	a	deferred	award.	100%	of	these	deferred	awards	will	be	paid	out	unless	there	has	been	forfeiture	during	the	deferral	period	
and subject to continued employment at the date of release. At the year ended 30 April 2015 there has not been a forfeiture event under the Bonus Plan.
4.	2014/15	Multi-year	vesting	represents	the	2009	Part	B	LTIP	awards	that	vested	during	the	year	and	the	deferred	Bonus	Plan	awards	as	per	note	3	above.

02_BERKAR15_DirRemReport_66-87NEW.indd   81

14/07/2015   10:45

81

berkeley AnnuAl report 2015  /  governAnceStrategic reportgovernanceFinancialSDirectors’ Remuneration Report
continued

Percentage change in Group Chairman’s and the Managing Director’s remuneration 
The	table	below	compares	the	percentage	increase	in	the	Group	Chairman’s	and	Managing	Director’s	pay	(including	salary,	taxable	
benefits and annual bonus) between 2013/14 and 2014/15, with the wider employee population. The Company considers the full-time 
employee	population,	excluding	the	Main	Board,	to	be	an	appropriate	comparator	group	and	the	most	stable	point	of	comparison:

Base salary

Taxable	benefits

Annual bonus

2013/14 to 2014/15 year on year change (%)

A W Pidgley 
Group Chairman

R C Perrins  
Managing Director

Group employees

3.1%

2.2%

3.1%

3.3%

(3.0%)

3.3%

6.0%

0.6%

2.6%

Relative importance of spend on pay 
The table below sets out the relative importance of spend on pay in the 2014/15 and 2013/14 financial years compared with distributions 
to shareholders.

Remuneration of Group employees 
(including Directors)

Distributions to shareholders

2014/15 
(£m)

177

243

2013/14 
(£m)

142

195

% change

25%

25%

Statement of implementation of Remuneration Policy for 2015/16
The	details	surrounding	the	statement	of	implementation	of	our	Remuneration	Policy	for	2015/16	can	be	found	in	‘Our	Remuneration	at	
a	glance’	on	pages	71.

Consideration by the directors’ of matters relating to director’s remuneration 
Members of the Committee
The	Committee	currently	comprises	of	three	Independent	Non-executive	Directors,	Glyn	Barker	(Chairman),	Sir	John	Armitt	and	Andy	
Myers. 

The members of the Committee have no personal financial interest other than as shareholders in matters to be decided, no potential 
conflicts	of	interest	arising	from	cross	Directorships	and	no	day-to-day	involvement	in	the	running	of	the	business.

Director

Glyn Barker

Sir	John	Armitt

Andy Myers

Number of meetings during financial year

Number of meetings attended

2

2

2

2

2

2

Role of the Committee and activities
The key responsibilities of the Committee are to:

•	 	Determine	and	agree	with	the	Board	the	broad	policy	for	the	remuneration	of	the	Executive	Directors.	This	includes	salary,	Bonus	

Plans,	share	options,	other	share	based	incentives	and	pensions;

•	 	Determine	the	performance	conditions	for	the	Bonus	Plan	operated	by	the	Company	and	approve	the	total	annual	payments	made	

under	this	Plan;

•	 Determine	all	share	incentive	plans	for	approval	by	the	Board	and	shareholders;

•	 Take	into	account	the	views	of	shareholders	when	determining	plans	under	the	remuneration	policy;

•	 	Ensure	that	the	contractual	terms	on	termination,	and	any	payments	made,	are	fair	to	the	individual	and	the	Company	and	that	failure	

is	not	rewarded;

•	 Note	annually	the	remuneration	trends	and	any	major	changes	in	employee	benefit	structures	across	the	Company	or	Group.

02_BERKAR15_DirRemReport_66-87NEW.indd   82

14/07/2015   10:45

82

berkeley AnnuAl report 2015  /  governAnceThe Committee has formal terms of reference which describes its full remit. This can be downloaded from the section dealing with 
Investor Relations on the Berkeley website (www.berkeleygroup.co.uk).

The Committee’s activities during the 2014/15 financial year included:

Meeting

June	2014

Items discussed

•	 Annual	performance	targets	under	the	Annual	Bonus	Plan

•	 Draft	Remuneration	Report	for	the	year	ended	30	April	2014

•	 	Proposed	shareholder	consultation	regarding	the	new	Annual	Bonus	Plan

•	 Pay	review	for	the	Group	for	the	year	ended	30	April	2014

March 2015

•	 Executive	Remuneration	Benchmarking	report

•	 Market	trends	and	Corporate	Governance	update

•	 2009	LTIP	Part	B	vesting

Advisors to the Committee
In	determining	the	Executive	Directors’	remuneration	for	the	year,	the	Committee	consulted	with	the	Group	Chairman,	Tony	Pidgley,	the	
Group	Managing	Director,	Rob	Perrins	and	the	then	Group	Finance	Director,	Nick	Simpkin.	No	Director	played	a	part	in	any	discussion	
about his own remuneration. 

In addition, the Committee appointed PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP (PwC) as its independent remuneration advisor following the 
appointment	of	new	auditors.	PwC	also	provided	Berkeley	with	tax	advisory	services	during	the	year.	The	Committee	reviewed	the	
nature	of	the	other	services	provided	by	PwC	and	was	satisfied	that	no	conflict	of	interest	exists	or	existed	in	the	provision	of	these	
services. 

PwC is a member of the Remuneration Consultants Group and the voluntary code of conduct of that body is designed to ensure 
objective and independent advice is given to remuneration committees

Fixed	fees	of	£50,000	were	provided	to	PwC	during	the	year	in	respect	of	remuneration	advice	received.	In	2013/14,	the	Company	paid	
a	retainer	fee	of	£50,000	to	PwC	for	services	in	relation	to	remuneration	advice	provided	to	the	Board.

Statement of Voting at General Meeting

The table below shows the binding vote approving the Directors’ Remuneration Policy and the advisory vote on the Annual Report on 
Remuneration at the AGM held on 1 September 2014.

2014 AGM resolution

Votes for

%

Votes against

%

4.11

4,090,177

8,651,549

8.38

Votes withheld

4,238,568

605,509

Directors’ Remuneration Policy

Annual Report on Remuneration

95,528,881

94,600,568

95.88

91.61

The Directors Remuneration Report has been approved by the Board.

By Order of the Board

Glyn Barker
Chairman of the Remuneration Committee
30	June	2015

02_BERKAR15_DirRemReport_66-87NEW.indd   83

14/07/2015   10:45

83

berkeley AnnuAl report 2015  /  governAnceStrategic reportgovernanceFinancialSDirectors’ Report

The Directors submit their report together 
with the audited consolidated and 
company financial statements for the year 
ended  30 April 2015.

Principal activities and review of the 
business
The	Company	is	the	UK	holding	company	
of a Group engaged in residential-led 
property development focusing on urban 
regeneration	and	mixed-use	developments.	
The Company is incorporated and 
domiciled	in	England	and	Wales	and	is	
quoted	on	the	London	Stock	Exchange.	

The information that fulfils the 
requirements	of	the	Strategic	report	
can be found on pages 6 to 54 of the 
Annual Report which provide more 
detailed commentaries on the business 
performance during the year together with 
the outlook for the future. In particular, 
information in respect of the principal 
financial and operating risks of the business 
is set out on pages 23 to 31 of the Strategic 
Report. 

Trading results and dividends
The Group’s consolidated profit after 
taxation	for	the	financial	year	was	£423.5	
million	(2014:	£292.9	million).	The	Group’s	
joint ventures contributed a profit after 
taxation	of	£28.3	million	(2014:	£12.1	million).	

An	interim	dividend	of	90	pence	per	
share was paid to shareholders on 26 
September 2014 and a further interim 
dividend	of	90	pence	per	share	was	paid	to	
shareholders	on	23	January	2015.	A	further	
interim	dividend	of	90	pence	per	share	
is	proposed,	payable	on	17	September	
2015 to shareholders on the register on 
14 August 2015.

Post balance sheet event
The	Group	has	exchanged	contracts	for	
the sale of a portfolio of ground rent assets 
for	£53	million.	The	sale	is	expected	to	give	
rise to a non-recurring profit on disposal of 
approximately	£50	million	after	transaction	
costs following legal completion in the year 
ending 30 April 2016.

Share capital
The	Company	had	136,657,183	ordinary	
shares in issue at 30 April 2015 (2014: 
135,357,183).	No	shares	are	held	in	treasury.	
Authority will be sought from shareholders 
at the forthcoming Annual General Meeting 
to renew the authority given at the 2014 
Annual General Meeting for a further year, 
permitting the Company to purchase its 
own shares in the market up to a limit of 
10%	of	its	issued	share	capital.	

Movements in the Company’s share capital 
are shown in note 20 to the consolidated 
financial statements. 

Information on the Group’s share option 
schemes is set out in note 6 to the 
consolidated financial statements. Details 
of the Long-Term Incentive Schemes 
and Long-Term Incentive Plans for key 
executives	are	set	out	within	the	Directors’	
Remuneration	Report	on	pages	66	to	83.

Articles of association
The Articles of Association set out the 
basic management and administrative 
structure of the Company. They regulate 
the internal affairs of the Company and 
cover such matters as the issue and 
transfer of shares, Board and shareholder 
meetings, powers and duties of Directors 
and borrowing powers. In accordance with 
the Articles of Association, Directors can 
be appointed or removed by shareholders 
in a general meeting. 

The Articles may only be amended by 
special resolution at a general meeting of 
shareholders. Copies are available by writing 
to the Company Secretary and are also 
open to inspection at Companies House. 

Directors
The Directors of the Company and their 
profiles	are	detailed	on	pages	58	and	59.	
All of these Directors served throughout 
the	year	under	review	with	the	exception	of	
Richard Stearn who was appointed to the 
Board on 13 April 2015. David Howell stood 
down from the Board on 1 September 
2014	and	Nick	Simpkin	left	the	Board	on	
8 September	2014.

The Articles of Association of the Company 
require	Directors	to	submit	themselves	for	
re-election every three years. In addition 
all Directors are subject to election at the 
first opportunity after their appointment 
to the Board. However, in accordance with 
the	UK	Corporate	Governance	Code	all	
the Directors will offer themselves for re-
election at the forthcoming Annual General 
Meeting. 

The Directors’ interests in the share capital 
of the Company and its subsidiaries are 

shown in the Directors’ Remuneration 
Report	on	page	70.	At	30	April	2015	each	
of	the	Executive	Directors	were	deemed	
to have a non-beneficial interest in 100,156 
(2014:	106,799)	ordinary	shares	held	by	the	
Trustees of The Berkeley Group Employee 
Benefit Trust. The trustee of the Berkeley 
Group Holdings Employee Benefit Trust 
(“EBT”) has agreed not to vote on any 
shares held in the EBT at any general 
meeting. 

There were no contracts of significance 
during, or at the end of, the financial year in 
which a Director of the Company is, or was, 
materially interested, other than those set 
out in note 6 to the consolidated financial 
statements, the contracts of employment 
of	the	Executive	Directors,	which	are	
terminable within one year, and the 
appointment	terms	of	the	Non-executive	
Directors, which are renewable annually 
and terminable on one month’s notice. 

Directors’ indemnities
The Company’s practice has always been 
to indemnify its Directors in accordance 
with the Company’s Articles of Association 
and	to	the	maximum	extent	permitted	
by	law.	Qualifying	third	party	indemnities,	
under which the Company has agreed 
to indemnify the Directors, were in force 
during the financial year and at the date 
of approval of the financial statements, in 
accordance with the Company’s Articles 
of	Association	and	to	the	maximum	extent	
permitted by law, in respect of all costs, 
charges,	expenses,	losses	and	liabilities,	
which they may incur in or about the 
execution	of	their	duties	to	the	Company,	
or any entity which is an associated 
company (as defined in Section 256 of 
the Companies Act 2006), or as a result 
of duties performed by the Directors 
on behalf of the Company or any such 
associated company. 

Substantial shareholders
The Company has been notified of the 
following interests, pursuant to Rule 5 of 
the Disclosure Rules and Transparency 
Rules,	as	at	29	June	2015:	

Number of ordinary  
shares held

% of issued  
share capital

First	Eagle	Investment	
Management LLC

BlackRock Inc.

Anthony	William	Pidgley

13,092,232

9,343,421

6,368,153

Standard Life Investments

6,443,253

9.97

6.84

4.66

4.76

Nature of  
holdings

Direct

Indirect

Direct

Indirect/Indirect

84

02_BERKAR15_DirRemReport_66-87NEW.indd   84

14/07/2015   10:45

berkeley AnnuAl report 2015  /  governAnceDonations
The Group made no political donations 
(2014:	£nil)	during	the	year.	

Employment policy
The Group’s policy of operating through 
autonomous subsidiaries has ensured close 
consultation with employees on matters 
likely to affect their interests. The Group is 
firmly committed to the continuation and 
strengthening of communication lines with 
all its employees. 

An	Equal	Opportunities	Policy	was	
introduced	in	2001.	Following	periodic	
reviews (the most recent in September 
2010)	the	policy	is	now	an	Equality	
and Diversity Policy with the aim of 
ensuring that all employees, potential 
employees and other individuals receive 
equal	treatment	(including	access	to	
employment, training and opportunity 
for promotion) regardless of their age, 
disability, gender reassignment, marriage 
and civil partnership, pregnancy and 
maternity, race, religion or belief (including 
lack	of	belief),	sex	and	sexual	orientation.	
It is the policy of the Group to support the 
employment of people with disabilities 
wherever practicable and to ensure, 
as far as possible, the training, career 
development and promotion opportunities 
are available to all employees. This policy 
includes employees who become disabled 
whilst employed by the Group. 

All disclosures concerning diversity of the 
Group’s Directors, senior management 
and	employees	(as	required	under	the	
Companies Act 2006 (Strategic Report 
and Directors’ Report) Regulations 2013) 
are contained within the Strategic Report 
on	page	47.

Sustainability 
The Group considers its approach to 
sustainability, defined as the effective 
management of environmental, social and 
economic risks and opportunities facing 
the company, to be an integral part of 
managing its business. Our framework 
for the business, Our Vision, sets out 
our integrated approach to managing 
sustainability	within	the	context	of	the	
wider aims for the business. This approach 
is outlined within the Strategic Report and 
more	extensive	information	is	available	on	
Berkeley’s	website.	We	believe	that	this	
integrated approach demonstrates how 
sustainability is embedded within the day-
to-day operations of our business.

We	remain	committed	to	enhancing	the	
Group’s high standards through continuous 
improvement. The Board is responsible 

for setting the strategic objectives 
and continues to monitor strategic 
development and progress against 
commitments	and	Key	Performance	
Indicators.	The	Sustainability	Working	
Group is responsible for delivering these 
objectives and reviewing progress against 
targets. 

Greenhouse gas emissions

2015 

2014 
  Restated

2,283	

1,853

11,248	

8,907

14,534	

11,481

28,066 

22,242

2.56 

2.53 

Scope 1 (tCO2e) 

Scope 2 (tCO2e) 

Scope 3 (tCO2e) 

Total (tCO2e) 

Emissions intensity 
(tCO2e/person)

The Group has reported on greenhouse 
gas emissions for which it is responsible, as 
required	under	the	Companies	Act	2006	
(Strategic Report and Directors’ Reports) 
Regulations 2013. The emissions disclosed 
are aligned to the Group’s financial 
reporting year, are considered material 
to its business and have the following 
parameters:

Scope	1	–	direct	emissions	relating	to	office,	
sales	and	development	site	activities;	and	
work-related travel in company owned 
vehicles;

Scope	2	–	indirect	emissions	from	
electricity consumed for office, sales and 
development	site	activities;

Scope	3	–	other	indirect	emissions	relating	
to office, sales and development site 
activities;	work	related	travel	in	leased	and	
employee	owned	vehicles;	business	air	
travel;	transmission	and	distribution	losses	
of	purchased	electricity;	and	upstream	
emissions.

Emissions	include	50%	of	those	resulting	
from the Group’s joint ventures on the basis 
of	its	equity	share.

The intensity ratio has been calculated 
using the total number of direct employees 
across the Group and the number of 
contractors working on our sites.

The	UK	Government	Environmental	
Reporting	Guidelines	2014	and	UK	
Government	GHG	Conversion	Factors	
for Company Reporting 2014 have been 
used to calculate and report the Group’s 
greenhouse gas emissions.

2014 data has been restated based on 
energy billing information which was 
received after the publication of the 

85

Annual	Report	2014.	Further	details	on	the	
methodology adopted can be found at 
berkeleygroup.co.uk/sustainability/reports-
and-case-studies, and other environmental 
key	performance	indicators	(KPIs)	can	
be found at berkeleygroup.co.uk/about-
berkeley-group/our-vision/performance.

Health and safety 
The Group considers the effective 
management of health and safety to 
be an integral part of managing its 
business. Accordingly, the Group Main 
Board continues to monitor the strategic 
development and audit the implementation 
by all divisions of their Occupational Health 
& Safety Management Systems to ensure 
that, both at Group and divisional level, 
they remain compliant with recognised 
established standards. 

We	remain	committed	to	enhancing	the	
Group’s high standards through continuous 
improvement. The Board is responsible 
for setting the strategic objectives of the 
Group,	and	the	Health	&	Safety	Working	
Group,	comprising	divisional	executives	
and managers, is responsible for delivering 
these objectives and reviewing progress 
against targets set for our established key 
performance indicators, reporting this 
quarterly	to	the	Group	Main	Board.

Takeover directive – agreements 
Pursuant to the Companies Act 2006, the 
Company	is	required	to	disclose	whether	
there are any significant agreements that 
take effect, alter or terminate upon a 
change of control. 

Change of control provisions are included 
as standard in many types of commercial 
agreement, notably bank facility 
agreements and joint venture shareholder 
agreements, for the protection of both 
parties. Such standard terms are included 
in Berkeley’s bank facility agreement 
which contains provisions that give the 
banks certain rights upon a change of 
control of the Company. Similarly, in certain 
circumstances, a change of control may 
give Berkeley’s joint venture partners, 
Prudential Assurance Company Limited 
and	National	Grid	plc,	the	ability	to	exercise	
certain rights under the shareholder 
agreements in relation to their St Edward 
Homes	and	St	William	Homes	joint	
ventures respectively. 

In addition, the Company’s share schemes 
contain provisions which take effect 
upon change of control. These do not 
entitle the participants to a greater 
interest in the shares of the Company 
than that created by the initial grant of 

02_BERKAR15_DirRemReport_66-87NEW.indd   85

14/07/2015   10:45

berkeley AnnuAl report 2015  /  governAnceStrategic reportgovernanceFinancialS 
 
 
 
Directors’ Report
continued

the award. The Company does not have 
any arrangements with any Director that 
provide compensation for loss of office or 
employment resulting from a takeover. 

The	remaining	information	required	to	be	
disclosed under the Takeover Directive 
can be found within notes 6 and 20 to the 
consolidated financial statements.

Independent Auditors and disclosure of 
information to Auditors
Each of the persons who is a Director at 
the date of approval of this Annual Report 
confirms that: 

•	 	So	far	as	the	Director	is	aware,	there	is	no	
relevant audit information of which the 
Company’s	auditors	are	unaware;	and

•	 	The	Director	has	taken	all	the	steps	that	
he/she ought to have taken as a Director 
in order to make himself/herself aware 
of any relevant audit information and to 
establish that the Company’s auditors 
are aware of that information. 

This confirmation is given and should 
be interpreted in accordance with the 
provisions	of	Section	418	of	the	Companies	
Act 2006. 

A	resolution	to	appoint	KPMG	LLP	as	
auditors to the Company will be proposed 
at the Annual General Meeting.

Annual general meeting
The Annual General Meeting of the 
Company	is	to	be	held	at	the	Woodlands	
Park	Hotel,	Woodlands	Lane,	Stoke	
D’Abernon,	Cobham,	Surrey	KT11	3QB	
at	11.00am	on	8	September	2015.	The	
Notice	of	Meeting,	which	is	contained	in	a	
separate letter from the Group Chairman 
accompanying this report, includes 
a commentary on the business to be 
transacted at the Annual General Meeting. 

Share capital structure
The	Company	is	compliant	with	DTR	7.2.6.	
and the information relating to the 
Company’s share capital structure is  
included	in	the	Directors’	Report	on	page	84.

Statement of Directors’ responsibilities 
in respect of the Annual Report and the 
Financial Statements
The Directors are responsible for preparing 
the Annual Report, the Directors’ 
Remuneration Report and the financial 
statements in accordance with applicable 
law and regulations. 

Company	law	requires	the	Directors	
to prepare financial statements for 
each financial year. Under that law the 
Directors have prepared the Group 
Financial	Statements	in	accordance	with	

International	Financial	Reporting	Standards	
(IFRSs)	as	adopted	by	the	European	Union,	
and have prepared the Parent Company 
Financial	Statements	in	accordance	with	
United	Kingdom	Accounting	Standards	
(United	Kingdom	Generally	Accepted	
Accounting Practice) and applicable law. 

Under company law the Directors must not 
approve the financial statements unless 
they are satisfied that they give a true and 
fair view of the state of affairs of the Group 
and the Company and of the profit or loss 
of the Group for that period. 

In preparing these financial statements, the 
Directors	are	required	to:

•	 	select	suitable	accounting	policies	and	

then	apply	them	consistently;

•	 	make	judgements	and	estimates	that	are	

reasonable	and	prudent;

•	 	state	whether	IFRS	as	adopted	by	

the European Union and applicable 
UK	accounting	standards	have	been	
followed, subject to any material 
departures	disclosed	and	explained	
in the Group and Parent Company 
Financial	Statements	respectively;	and

•	 	prepare	financial	statements	on	

the going concern basis unless it is 
inappropriate to presume that the Group 
will continue in business. 

The Directors are responsible for keeping 
adequate	accounting	records	that	
are	sufficient	to	show	and	explain	the	
Company’s transactions and disclose 
with reasonable accuracy at any time the 
financial position of the Company and 
the Group and to enable them to ensure 
that the financial statements and the 
Directors’ Remuneration Report comply 
with the Companies Act 2006 and, as 
regards the Group financial statements, 
Article 4 of the IAS Regulation. They are 
also responsible for safeguarding the 
assets of the Company and the Group 
and hence for taking reasonable steps for 
the prevention and detection of fraud and 
other irregularities. 

The Directors are responsible for the 
maintenance and integrity of the Company’s 
website. Legislation in the United 
Kingdom	governing	the	preparation	and	
dissemination of financial statements may 
differ from legislation in other jurisdictions. 

Directors responsibility statement
Each of the Directors, whose names and 
functions	are	listed	on	pages	58	and	59	
confirm that, to the best of each person’s 
knowledge: 

86

a.  the Group financial statements, which 

have been prepared in accordance with 
IFRS’s	as	adopted	by	the	European	
Union, give a true and fair view of the 
assets, liabilities, financial position and 
profit	of	the	Group;	and

b.  the Strategic Report, together with the 
Directors’ report, includes a fair review 
of the development and performance 
of the business and the position of the 
Group, together with a description of the 
principal risks and uncertainties that it 
faces;

c.  the Annual Report, taken as a whole, is 
fair, balanced and understandable and 
provides the information necessary for 
shareholders to assess the Company’s 
performance, business model and 
strategy.

Going concern
The Group’s business activities together 
with the factors likely to affect its future 
development performance and position 
are set out in the Strategic Report. The 
financial position of the Group, its cash 
flows,	liquidity	position	and	borrowing	
facilities are all described in the Trading and 
Financial	Review	on	pages	50	to	54.

The Group has significant financial 
resources and the Directors have assessed 
the	future	funding	requirements	of	the	
Group,	including	the	repayment	of	£1.7	
billion to shareholders by 2021, and 
compared this to the level of committed 
loan facilities and cash resources over the 
medium term. In making this assessment 
consideration has been given to the 
uncertainty inherent in future financial 
forecasts and where applicable reasonable 
sensitivities have been applied to the key 
factors affecting the financial performance 
of the Group. 

The Directors have a reasonable 
expectation	that	the	Company	has	
adequate	resources	to	continue	its	
operational	existence	for	the	foreseeable	
future.	For	this	reason	they	continue	
to adopt the going concern basis of 
accounting in preparing the annual 
financial statements.

By order of the Board 

EA Driver
Company Secretary
The Berkeley Group Holdings plc 
Registered	number:	5172586 
30	June	2015

02_BERKAR15_DirRemReport_66-87NEW.indd   86

14/07/2015   10:45

berkeley AnnuAl report 2015  /  governAnceKidbrooke Village.

87

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2015  /  GOVERNANCESTRATEGIC REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIALSJoggers on the riverbank at 
Woodberry Park in Hackney.

88

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2015  /  FINANCIALSFinancials

89

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2015  /  FINANCIALSSTRATEGIC REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIALSIndependent Auditors’ report
to the members of The Berkeley Group Holdings plc

Opinions and conclusions arising from our audit 

1) Our opinion on the financial statements is unmodified 
We have audited the financial statements of The Berkeley Group Holdings plc for the year ended 30 April 2015 set out on pages 94 to 
125. In our opinion: 

•	 	the	financial	statements	give	a	true	and	fair	view	of	the	state	of	the	Group’s	and	of	the	parent	company’s	affairs	as	at	30	April	2015	

and	of	the	Group’s	profit	for	the	year	then	ended;	

•	 	the	Group	financial	statements	have	been	properly	prepared	in	accordance	with	International	Financial	Reporting	Standards	as	

adopted	by	the	European	Union;	

•	 the	parent	company	financial	statements	have	been	properly	prepared	in	accordance	with	UK	Accounting	Standards;	and	

•	 	the	financial	statements	have	been	prepared	in	accordance	with	the	requirements	of	the	Companies	Act	2006	and,	as	regards	the	

Group	financial	statements,	Article	4	of	the	IAS	Regulation.	

2) Our assessment of risks of material misstatement 
In	arriving	at	our	audit	opinion	above	on	the	financial	statements	the	risks	of	material	misstatement	that	had	the	greatest	effect	on	our	
audit	were	as	follows:	

The risk

Our response

Carrying value of inventories and profit recognition (inventories: 
£2,654.1m, gross profit: £716.8m)

Refer	to	page	64	(Audit	Committee	Report),	pages	99	and	100	
(accounting	policy)	and	page	112	(financial	disclosures)

The	Group	recognises	profit	on	each	sale	by	reference	to	the	overall	
site	margin,	which	is	the	forecast	profit	percentage	for	a	site	that	
may	comprise	multiple	phases	and	can	last	a	number	of	years.	The	
recognition	of	profit	is	therefore	dependent	on	the	Group’s	estimate	
of	future	selling	prices	and	build	costs,	which	form	the	basis	of	the	site	
forecast. 

Future	selling	prices	are	dependent	on	market	conditions,	which	can	
be	difficult	to	predict.	Future	build	costs	are	subject	to	a	number	
of	variables	including	the	accuracy	of	designs,	market	conditions	in	
respect	of	materials	and	sub-contractor	cost	and	construction	issues.	

Inventory	represents	the	costs	of	land,	materials,	design	and	related	
production	and	site	costs	to	date.	It	is	held	at	the	lower	of	cost	and	
net	realisable	value,	the	latter	also	being	based	on	the	forecast	for	the	
site. As such errors in these forecasts can impact the assessment over 
the carrying value of inventories and gross profit.

There	is	a	risk	that	the	actual	revenue	and	costs	are	different	to	those	
forecast	across	whole	sites	resulting	in	material	misstatement	of	
inventory and gross profit recognised. 

There	is	also	a	risk	that	costs	are	inappropriately	recognised	within	
inventories	or	that	the	allocation	of	costs	that	relate	to	the	whole	site,	
such	as	land	and	infrastructure,	is	inappropriate	across	development	
phases,	resulting	in	a	material	misstatement	of	inventory	or	gross	
profit.

Our audit procedures in respect of this area included:

Testing	the	Group’s	controls	by	checking	approvals	over	reviewing	and	
updating	selling	price	and	cost	forecasts,	authorising	and	recording	of	
costs. 

We	inspected	the	minutes	and	attended	a	selection	of	management’s	
cost	review	meetings.	At	these	meetings	management	review	
actual	costs	and	revenues	against	detailed	site	budgets.	Estimates	
of	future	costs	and	selling	prices	in	the	forecasts	are	challenged	by	
management	including	reference	to	tendered	works	packages,	actual	
costs	incurred	and	forward	sales	reservation	prices.	Our	inspection	
of the minutes and attendance at a selection of meetings included 
assessing	whether	the	appropriate	individuals	attended	the	meetings	
and that the valuations and costs to complete forecasts for all 
developments	were	discussed,	challenged	and	the	valuations	updated	
as appropriate.

We	inspected	the	site	forecasts,	on	a	sample	basis,	and	challenged	the	
assumptions for future costs and sales. 

We	corroborated	a	sample	of	forecast	costs	back	to	supplier	
agreements or tenders. We also considered the appropriateness of 
allowances	made	for	cost	increases	and	for	risks	inherent	in	longer	
term developments. We agreed a sample of additions in the inventory 
balance	to	invoices	and/or	payments,	including	checking	that	they	
were	allocated	to	the	appropriate	site	and	development	phase	and	
met the definition of inventory costs.

For	all	significant	new	land	acquisitions	and	a	sample	of	other	land	
acquisitions	we	inspected	purchase	contracts	to	understand	the	
terms	and	any	deferred	or	contingent	payments.	We	re-performed	
the	calculation	of	such	amounts	to	check	the	amounts	recorded.	For	
a	sample	of	both	pre-development	and	active	sites	we	evaluated	
the reliance on planning and other third party actions to achieve the 
forecast and considered the impact on carrying values.

We compared the margin recognised in the year on any units sold 
to the forecast site margin over the life of the development. We 
evaluated the sensitivity of the margin to a change in sales prices and 
costs	and	considered	whether	this	indicated	a	risk	of	impairment	of	
the	inventory	balance.

We	considered	the	adequacy	of	the	Group’s	disclosures	over	
inventory	and	the	degree	of	judgement	and	estimation	involved	in	
arriving at the forecast and resultant profit.

03_BERKAR15_IndAuditors_90-93.indd   90

14/07/2015   10:22

90

berkeley AnnuAl report 2015  /  finAnciAlsThe risk

Our response

Revenue recognition (£2,120.0m)

Our audit procedures in respect of this area included:

Refer	to	page	64	(Audit	Committee	Report)	and	page	99	(accounting	
policy).

It	is	the	Group’s	policy	to	recognise	100%	of	revenue	on	property	units	
when	contracts	are	exchanged	and	the	building	work	is	physically	
complete,	being	the	point	at	which	the	Group	is	satisfied	it	has	
discharged	its	obligations	to	the	buyer.	Contract	exchange,	including	
the	payment	of	a	deposit,	may	have	occurred	sometime	in	the	past.	
However,	the	legal	completion	of	the	sale,	being	the	point	at	which	the	
balance	of	the	sale	is	paid	for	and	title	transfers,	remains	dependent	
on the receipt of final payment. The recognition of revenue is generally 
before	legal	completion,	and	as	such	is	potentially	more	subjective	
than recognising at the latter point. 

The	risk	is	that	the	unit	is	not	physically	complete	or	that	the	buyer	
does	not	complete	the	purchase,	as	should	either	of	these	be	the	case	
the	revenue	should	not	be	recognised.	

The group also recognised revenue and resultant profit on the 
disposal of a portfolio of ground rents in the period. A second tranche 
of	ground	rent	sales	is	due	to	complete	after	the	balance	sheet	
date.	The	risk	pertaining	to	the	sale	of	ground	rents	in	both	tranches	
is	whether	the	risks	and	rewards	of	ownership	of	the	assets	have	
transferred	to	the	purchaser	at	the	balance	sheet	date	and	that	the	
transaction is recorded appropriately in the financial statements.

Testing controls over property sales including:

•   documentation evidencing internal and third party physical 

inspection	and	confirmation	of	build	complete	status;

•   customer signature in acceptance of the physical condition of the 

property;	and

•   customer	background	checks	including	checks	of	availability	of	

funds

For	a	sample	of	property	sales	in	the	year,	we	performed	the	following	
test:

•	inspected	the	paperwork	confirming	legal	completion

For	a	sample	of	sales	recorded	close	to	the	year	end	where	the	final	
payment	was	not	yet	received,	we	performed	the	following	tests:

•  performed	site	visits	to	verify	build	completion	status;	

•   inspected	the	internal	sign-off	sheets	to	check	that	sales	recorded	
in	the	year	had	gone	through	the	Group’s	approval	process	for	sale	
of	properties;	

•   	after	the	year	end,	and	up	to	the	date	of	signing	the	audit	report,	

we	confirmed	whether	final	payments	from	buyers	had	been	made	
and	appeared	as	receipts	in	the	bank	statements.	Where	significant	
amounts	were	still	outstanding	we	considered	other	information,	
such	as	correspondence	agreeing	subsequent	payment	and	
reasons	for	this,	or	reasons	for	known	recessions,	in	evaluating	the	
recoverability	of	these	amounts	and	appropriateness	of	related	
revenue recognition.

We also performed a physical inspection on a sample of properties for 
which	the	sale	had	not	been	recognised	to	check	that	these	did	not	
meet this criterion for revenue recognition. 

We	also	used	data	analytics	to	look	at	journal	entries	posted	
throughout the period that impacted revenue to make sure the 
journals	were	appropriate.

We	reviewed	the	contracts	for	the	sale	of	ground	rent	assets	that	
exchanged	and	completed	in	the	period,	as	well	as	that	which	had	not	
completed	as	at	the	balance	sheet	date.	We	considered	the	respective	
treatments	in	conjunction	with	the	revenue	recognition	principles	of	
the	group’s	accounting	policy	and	those	under	EU-IFRS	to	ascertain	
if revenue and profit is appropriately recognised in the correct 
accounting period. 

In	particular	we	considered	the	transfer	of	risks	and	rewards	made	
under the agreement and timing of these. We have recalculated 
the profit on disposal recorded for the transaction completed in the 
period,	and	verified	revenue	recorded	to	the	sale	agreement.

We	have	also	considered	the	adequacy	of	the	Group’s	disclosures	in	
respect	of	the	judgements	taken	in	recognising	revenue	for	property	
units	prior	to	legal	completion	and	the	adequacy	of	the	disclosure	of	
the	Group’s	accounting	policy	with	regards	to	sales	of	ground	rent	
assets,	and	the	disclosure	of	the	two	transactions	undertaken.	

03_BERKAR15_IndAuditors_90-93.indd   91

14/07/2015   10:22

91

berkeley AnnuAl report 2015  /  finAnciAlsStrategic reportgovernanceFinancialSIndependent Auditors’ report to the members 
of The Berkeley Group Holdings plc
continued

The risk

Provisions (£75.1m)

Refer	to	page	64	(Audit	Committee	Report),	page	100	(accounting	
policy)	and	page	113	(financial	disclosures)

The Group holds provisions in respect of claims and construction 
related	liabilities	that	have	arisen,	or	that	prior	claims	experience	
indicates	may	arise,	subsequent	to	the	completion	of	certain	
developments,	as	well	as	in	relation	to	other	matters	of	litigation.

The	determination	and	valuation	of	provisions	is	judgmental	by	
its nature and there is a risk that the estimate is incorrect and the 
provision is materially misstated.

Our response

Our audit procedures in respect of this area included:

Enquiring	of	Group	and	divisional	Directors	and	inspecting	board	
minutes	for	actual	and	potential	claims	arising	in	the	year,	and	
challenging	whether	provisions	are	required	for	these	claims.	

For	all	significant	known	issues	and	claims	provided	for	we	inspected	
the calculation of the provision held and compared this to third party 
evidence,	where	available.	

For	claims	that	past	events	indicated	may	arise,	we	evaluated	settled	
issues	and	considered	any	differences	in	the	development	portfolio	
then	and	now,	such	as	increasing	complexity	of	construction,	as	
evidence for the calculation of the provision. 

In	respect	of	open	matters	of	litigation,	we	had	discussions	with	the	
Group’s	external	legal	advisors	and	reviewed	correspondence	in	
respect of these matters. 

We	assessed	each	provision	against	the	requirements	of	the	relevant	
accounting	standards	and	the	Group’s	policy	and	assessed	whether	
the	Group’s	disclosures	disclose	the	potential	liabilities	of	the	Group	in	
accordance	with	accounting	standards.

Share-based payment recognition (£55.5m)

Our audit procedures in respect of this area included:

Refer	to	page	64	(Audit	Committee	Report),	page	100	(accounting	
policy)	and	page	103	(financial	disclosures)

Share-based	payments	is	a	complex	accounting	area	and	there	
is a risk in the financial statements that amounts are incorrectly 
recognised	and/or	inappropriately	disclosed.

The	Group	also	changed	the	method	of	settlement	on	its	share-based	
long	term	incentive	plan	awards	which	vest	in	April	2015	and	April	
2016	from	equity-settled	to	cash-settled.	This	requires	further	complex	
accounting considerations.

We	made	inquiries	of	the	directors	to	understand	the	share-based	
payment	schemes	in	place	and	the	changes	made	to	the	awards	and	
inspected	communications	made	to	scheme	members	regarding	
these changes. We agreed the terms of settlement to the revised 
scheme	documents.	We	considered	whether	the	modifications	met	
the	criteria	for	a	change	in	accounting	treatment	and	whether	the	
accounting	treatment	was	appropriate.	We	also	considered	whether	
the	modification	impacted	the	treatment	of	other	awards	by	setting	
an	expectation	regarding	settlement.	

For	equity-settled	options	we	recalculated	the	estimated	charge	
which	reflected	the	best	estimate	of	the	number	of	options	expected	
to	vest.	For	cash-settled	schemes	we	inspected	the	vesting	price	and	
recalculated	the	amounts	to	be	recognised	in	the	financial	statements.

We	considered	the	adequacy	of	the	Group’s	disclosures	in	respect	
of	the	judgements	taken	in	the	choice	of	equity	or	cash	settled	
recognition treatment.

Compliance with Laws and Regulations 

Our audit procedures in respect of this area included:

Refer	to	page	64	(Audit	Committee	Report)

The	Group	is	subject	to	a	number	of	laws	and	regulations.	These	
include,	but	are	not	limited	to,	anti-bribery,	anti-money	laundering,	
sanctions	checking	and	those	relevant	to	publicly	traded	companies.

Failure	to	comply	with	any	of	these	applicable	laws	and	regulations	
could have a material financial and reputational impact on the 
business.

The	Directors	have	conducted	a	review	of	their	policies	in	these	areas,	
during	the	year	and	did	not	record	any	material	instances	of	non-
compliance.

Obtaining	an	understanding	of	the	relevant	legal	and	regulatory	
framework	within	which	the	Group	operates	and	assessing	the	design	
and	operation	of	its	key	controls	over	this	framework.	

We	discussed	the	applicable	policies	and	procedures	with	divisional	
and	group	management,	including	internal	legal	counsel.	We	reviewed	
Board	papers,	and	internal	audit	reports	for	any	recorded	instances	
of	potential	non-compliance,	and	maintained	a	high	level	of	vigilance	
when	carrying	out	our	other	audit	procedures	for	indications	of	non-
compliance.

We	reviewed	the	Group’s	documentation	and	correspondence	with	
respect	to	relevant	legal	matters.	We	had	discussions	with	the	Group’s	
external	legal	advisors	in	respect	of	these	matters.

03_BERKAR15_IndAuditors_90-93.indd   92

14/07/2015   10:22

92

berkeley AnnuAl report 2015  /  finAnciAls3) Our application of materiality and an overview of the scope of our audit 
The	materiality	for	the	Group	financial	statements	as	a	whole	was	set	at	£22.5m,	determined	with	reference	to	a	benchmark	of	Group	
profit	before	taxation	(excluding	profit	on	ground	rent	disposal),	of	£454.6m,	of	which	it	represents	5%.	

We	report	to	the	audit	committee	any	corrected	or	uncorrected	identified	misstatements	exceeding	£1.1m,	in	addition	to	other	identified	
misstatements	that	warranted	reporting	on	qualitative	grounds.	

Of	the	Group’s	14	reporting	components,	we	subjected	8	to	audits	for	group	reporting	purposes.	Our	procedures	for	group	reporting	
purposes	covered	balances	that	accounted	for	88%	of	Group	revenue;	94%	of	Group	profit	before	taxation	and	86%	of	Group	total	
assets. 

For	the	remaining	components,	we	performed	analysis	at	an	aggregated	Group	level	to	re-examine	our	assessment	that	there	were	no	
significant	risks	of	material	misstatement	within	these.

The	work	on	all	components	was	performed	by	the	Group	audit	team	using	component	materialities	ranging	from	£2.3m	to	£11.3m	
having	regard	to	the	mix	of	size	and	risk	profile	of	the	Group	across	the	components.

4) Our opinion on other matters prescribed by the Companies Act 2006 is unmodified
In our opinion: 
•	 	the	part	of	the	Directors’	Remuneration	Report	to	be	audited	has	been	properly	prepared	in	accordance	with	the	Companies	Act	

2006;	and

•	 	the	information	given	in	the	Strategic	Report	and	the	Directors’	Report	for	the	financial	year	for	which	the	financial	statements	are	

prepared	is	consistent	with	the	financial	statements.	

5) We have nothing to report in respect of the matters on which we are required to report by exception 
Under	ISAs	(UK	and	Ireland)	we	are	required	to	report	to	you	if,	based	on	the	knowledge	we	acquired	during	our	audit,	we	have	
identified	other	information	in	the	annual	report	that	contains	a	material	inconsistency	with	either	that	knowledge	or	the	financial	
statements,	a	material	misstatement	of	fact,	or	that	is	otherwise	misleading.	

In particular, we are required to report to you if: 
•	 	we	have	identified	material	inconsistencies	between	the	knowledge	we	acquired	during	our	audit	and	the	directors’	statement	that	

they	consider	that	the	annual	report	and	financial	statements	taken	as	a	whole	is	fair,	balanced	and	understandable	and	provides	the	
information	necessary	for	shareholders	to	assess	the	Group’s	performance,	business	model	and	strategy;	or

•	 	the	Audit	Committee	report	does	not	appropriately	address	matters	communicated	by	us	to	the	audit	committee.

Under the Companies Act 2006 we are required to report to you if, in our opinion: 
•	 	adequate	accounting	records	have	not	been	kept	by	the	parent	company,	or	returns	adequate	for	our	audit	have	not	been	received	

from	branches	not	visited	by	us;	or	

•	 	the	parent	company	financial	statements	and	the	part	of	the	Directors’	Remuneration	Report	to	be	audited	are	not	in	agreement	with	

the	accounting	records	and	returns;	or	

•	 	certain	disclosures	of	directors’	remuneration	specified	by	law	are	not	made;	or	

•	 	we	have	not	received	all	the	information	and	explanations	we	require	for	our	audit.	

Under the Listing Rules we are required to review: 
•	 	the	directors’	statement,	set	out	on	page	86,	in	relation	to	going	concern;	and	

•	 	the	part	of	the	Corporate	Governance	Statement	on	pages	60	relating	to	the	company’s	compliance	with	the	ten	provisions	of	the	

2012	UK	Corporate	Governance	Code	specified	for	our	review.

We	have	nothing	to	report	in	respect	of	the	above	responsibilities.	

Scope and responsibilities 
As	explained	more	fully	in	the	Directors’	Responsibilities	Statement	set	out	on	page	86,	the	directors	are	responsible	for	the	preparation	
of	the	financial	statements	and	for	being	satisfied	that	they	give	a	true	and	fair	view.	A	description	of	the	scope	of	an	audit	of	financial	
statements	is	provided	on	the	Financial	Reporting	Council’s	website	at	www.frc.org.uk/auditscopeukprivate.	This	report	is	made	solely	to	
the	Company’s	members	as	a	body	and	subject	to	important	explanations	and	disclaimers	regarding	our	responsibilities,	published	on	
our	website	at	www.kpmg.com/uk/auditscopeukco2014a	which	are	incorporated	into	this	report	as	if	set	out	in	full	and	should	be	read	
to	provide	an	understanding	of	the	purpose	of	this	report,	the	work	we	have	undertaken	and	the	basis	of	our	opinions.	

Sean McCallion (Senior Statutory Auditor)
for and on behalf of KPMG LLP, Statutory Auditor
Chartered	Accountants 
15	Canada	Square 
London,	E14	5GL 
30 June 2015

93

03_BERKAR15_IndAuditors_90-93.indd   93

14/07/2015   10:22

berkeley AnnuAl report 2015  /  finAnciAlsStrategic reportgovernanceFinancialSConsolidated Income Statement

For the year ended 30 April 

Revenue 

Revenue includes:

Revenue from operations 

Revenue from sale of ground rent assets 

Cost of sales 

Gross profit 

Gross profit includes:

Gross profit from operations 

Gross profit from sale of ground rent assets 

Net operating expenses 

Operating profit 

Finance income 

Finance costs 

Share of results of joint ventures using the equity method  

Profit before taxation for the year 

Income tax expense 

Profit after taxation for the year 

Earnings per ordinary share: 

Basic 

Diluted 

Notes 

3 

3 

4 

4 

11 

2, 5 

7 

2015 
£m 

2,120.0 

2,020.2 

99.8 

(1,403.2) 

716.8 

631.7 

85. 1  

(192.7) 

524. 1  

3.0 

(15.7) 

28.3 

539.7 

(116.2) 

423.5 

2014 
£m

1,620.6

1,620.6

–

(1,111.7)

508.9

508.9

–

(134. 1 )

374.8

3.4

(10.3)

12. 1

380.0

(87. 1 )

292.9

8 

8 

313.0p 

276.9p 

221.8p

188.4p

Consolidated Statement of 
Comprehensive Income

For the year ended 30 April 

Profit after taxation for the year 

Other comprehensive expense:

Items that will not be reclassified to profit or loss

Remeasurements of the net defined benefit asset/liability 

Deferred tax on remeasurements of the net defined benefit asset/liability 

Total items that will not be reclassified to profit or loss 

Items that may be reclassified subsequently to profit or loss

Change in value of other investments 

Total items that may be reclassified subsequently to profit or loss 

Other comprehensive income for the year 

Total comprehensive income for the year 

94

Notes 

6 

7 

12 

2015 
£m 

423.5 

(0.6) 

0. 1  

(0.5) 

1.0 

1.0 

0.5 

2014 
£m

292.9

(0.6)

 0. 1

(0.5)

1.0

1.0

0.5

424.0 

293.4

04_BERKAR15_PrimaryStats_94-97.indd   94

14/07/2015   10:23

berkeley AnnuAl report 2015  /  finAnciAls 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Consolidated Statement of 
Financial Position

As at 30 April 

Assets 

Non-current assets 

Intangible assets 

Property, plant and equipment 

Investment properties 

Investments accounted for using the equity method 

Other investments 

Deferred tax assets 

Current assets 

Inventories 

Trade and other receivables 

Cash and cash equivalents 

Total assets 

Liabilities

Non-current liabilities

Trade and other payables 

Provisions for other liabilities  

Current liabilities

Borrowings 

Trade and other payables 

Current tax liabilities 

Provisions for other liabilities  

Total liabilities 

Total net assets 

Equity 

Shareholders’ equity

Share capital 

Share premium 

Capital redemption reserve 

Other reserve 

Revaluation reserve 

Retained profit 

Total equity 

Notes 

9 

10 

10 

11 

12 

19 

13 

14 

15, 25 

17 

18 

16 

17 

18 

20 

20 

21 

21 

21 

21 

2015 
£m 

17.2 

23.5 

0.2 

50. 1  

12.0 

72.7 

175.7 

2,654. 1  

145.6 

430.9 

3,230.6 

3,406.3 

(131.7) 

(61.1 ) 

(192.8) 

– 

(1,503.8) 

(57.8) 

(14.0) 

(1,575.6) 

(1,768.4) 

1,637.9 

6.8 

49.6 

24.5 

(961.3) 

– 

2,518.3 

1,637.9 

2014 
£m

 17.2

 22.0

 7.2

 61.4

11.0

61. 1

179.9

 2,481.2

 159.0

130.2

 2,770.4

 2,950.3

(148.6)

(48.5)

(197.1 )

(1.0)

(1,218.6)

(83.7)

(8.6)

(1,311.9)

(1,509.0)

1,441.3

6.8

 49.3

 24.5

(961.3)

 4.1

2,317.9

 1,441.3

The financial statements on pages 94 to 120 were approved by the board of directors on 30 June 2015 and were signed on its behalf by:

R J Stearn
Finance Director

04_BERKAR15_PrimaryStats_94-97.indd   95

14/07/2015   10:23

95

berkeley AnnuAl report 2015  /  finAnciAlsStrategic reportgovernanceFinancialS 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Consolidated Statement of 
Changes in Equity

Share  
 Share  
capital    premium  
£m 

£m 

Notes 

Capital 
 redemption  

 Other  
 reserve    reserve  
£m 

 £m 

 Revaluation    Retained 
 earnings  
£m 

 reserve  
£m 

 Total 
£m

6.8 

49.3 

24.5 

 (961.3) 

4. 1  

2,317.9 

1,441.3

At 1 May 2014 

Profit after taxation for the year 

Other comprehensive income for the year 

Total comprehensive income for the year 

Reserves transfer from revaluation reserve  

Issue of ordinary shares 

Transactions with shareholders: 

Credit in respect of employee  
share schemes  

Deferred tax in respect of  
employee share schemes 

Dividends to equity holders of 
the Company 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

0.3 

– 

– 

– 

21 

20 

6 

7 

22 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

 – 

 – 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

At 30 April 2015 

6.8 

49.6 

24.5 

 (961.3) 

 Share  
Share  
capital    premium  
£m 

£m 

Notes 

Capital  
 redemption  

 Other  
 reserve    reserve  
£m 

 £m 

– 

– 

– 

(4. 1 ) 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

423.5 

423.5

0.5 

0.5

424.0 

424.0

4. 1  

– 

–

0.3

2.7 

2.7

13.1  

13.1

(243.5) 

(243.5)

2,518.3 

1,637.9

 Revaluation    Retained 
 earnings  
£m 

 reserve  
£m 

 Total 
£m

At 1 May 2013 

Profit after taxation for the year 

Other comprehensive income for the year 

Total comprehensive income for the year 

Reserves transfer from revaluation reserve  

Issue of ordinary shares 

Transactions with shareholders: 

Credit in respect of employee  
share schemes  

Deferred tax in respect of 
employee share schemes 

Dividends to equity holders of 
the Company 

6.7 

49.3 

24.5 

 (961.3) 

4.0 

2,199.2 

1,322.4

– 

– 

– 

– 

0. 1  

– 

– 

– 

21 

20 

6 

7 

22 

 – 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

 – 

 – 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

0. 1  

– 

– 

– 

– 

292.9 

292.9

0.5 

0.5

293.4 

293.4

(0.1 ) 

– 

–

0.1

3.3 

3.3

17.3 

17.3 

(195.2) 

(195.2)

At 30 April 2014 

6.8 

49.3 

24.5 

 (961.3) 

4. 1  

2,317.9 

1,441.3

04_BERKAR15_PrimaryStats_94-97.indd   96

14/07/2015   10:23

96

berkeley AnnuAl report 2015  /  finAnciAls 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Consolidated Cash Flow Statement

For the year ended 30 April 

Cash flows from operating activities

Cash generated from operations 

Proceeds from sale of investment properties* 

Interest received 

Interest paid 

Income tax paid 

Net cash flow from operating activities 

Cash flows from investing activities

Purchase of property, plant and equipment 

Purchase of financial assets 

Dividends from investments accounted for using the equity method 

Proceeds on disposal of property, plant and equipment 

Movements in loans with joint ventures 

Net cash flow from investing activities 

Cash flows from financing activities

Proceeds from issue of shares 

Increased/(Repayment of) borrowings 

Dividends paid to Company’s shareholders 

Net cash flow from financing activities 

Net increase in cash and cash equivalents 

Cash and cash equivalents at the start of the financial year 

Cash and cash equivalents at the end of the financial year 

Notes 

25 

10 

11 

11 

22 

15, 25 

2015 
£m 

643.6 

8.3 

3.2 

(5.4) 

(140.5) 

509.2 

(4.6) 

– 

12.3 

0.6 

27.3 

35.6 

0.4 

(1.0) 

(243.5) 

(244. 1 ) 

300.7 

130.2 

430.9 

2014 
£m

259.7

138.2

2.7

(5.0)

(92.4)

303.2

(8.9)

(10.0)

–

0.6

(5.2)

(23.5)

–

(21. 1 )

(195.2)

(216.3)

63.4

66.8

130.2

*  The Group has reviewed the classification of Proceeds from the sale of investment properties which is included within Cash flows from operating activities. 

In 2014, this was included within Cash flows from investing activities. 

04_BERKAR15_PrimaryStats_94-97.indd   97

14/07/2015   10:23

97

berkeley AnnuAl report 2015  /  finAnciAlsStrategic reportgovernanceFinancialS 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Consolidated 
Financial Statements

1 Accounting policies
General information
The Berkeley Group Holdings plc (the “Company”) is a public limited company incorporated and domiciled in the United Kingdom. The address of its 
registered office is Berkeley House, 19 Portsmouth Road, Cobham, Surrey, KT11 1JG. The Company and its subsidiaries (together the “Group”) are engaged in 
residential-led, mixed-use property development. Further information about the nature of the Group’s operations and its principal activities are set out in the 
Directors’ Report on page 83.

Basis of preparation
These Consolidated Financial Statements have been prepared in accordance with European Union endorsed International Financial Reporting Standards 
(“IFRSs”), IFRS-IC interpretations and with those parts of the Companies Act 2006 applicable to companies reporting under IFRS. The Consolidated 
Financial Statements have been prepared under the historical cost convention and on the going concern basis. Historical cost is generally based on the fair 
value of the consideration given in exchange for the assets.

The preparation of financial statements in conformity with IFRS requires the use of certain critical accounting estimates. It also requires management to 
exercise its judgement in the process of applying the Group’s accounting policies. The areas involving a higher degree of judgement or complexity, or areas 
where assumptions and estimates are significant to the Consolidated Financial Statements, are disclosed on page 101.

The following new standards, amendments to standards and interpretations are applicable to the Group and are mandatory for the first time for the 
financial year beginning 1 May 2014: IFRS 10 Consolidated Financial Statements; IFRS 11 Joint Arrangements; IFRS 12 Disclosure of Interest in Other Entities; 
IAS 27 (amendment), Consolidated and Separate Financial Statements;  IAS 28 (Amendment), Investments in Associates and Joint Ventures; IAS 32 
(amendment), Financial Instruments; IAS 36 (amendment), Impairment of Assets and IAS 39 (amendment), Financial Instruments. 

These standards have not had a material impact on the results of the Company for the year ended 30 April 2015.

The following new standards, amendments to standards and interpretations have been issued, but are not yet effective for the financial year ending 30 April 
2015 and have not been adopted early: IAS 19 (Amendments) Employee contributions, Annual Improvements 2010-2012 Cycle, Annual Improvements 
2011-2013 Cycle, Annual Improvements 2012-2014, IFRS10 and IAS 28 (Amendments) Sale or Contribution of Assets between an Investor and its Associate 
or Joint Venture, IFRS15 Revenue from Contracts with Customers and IFRS 9 Financial Instruments.

These standards are not expected to have a significant impact on the Consolidated Financial Statements.

The Group has significant financial resources and the Directors have assessed the future funding requirements of the Group and compared this to the level 
of committed loan facilities and cash resources over the medium term. In making this assessment, consideration has been given to the uncertainty inherent 
in future financial forecasts and where applicable, reasonable sensitivities have been applied to the key factors affecting the financial performance of the 
Group. The Directors have a reasonable expectation that the Group has adequate resources to continue its operational existence for the foreseeable future. 
For this reason they continue to adopt the going concern basis of accounting in preparing its Consolidated Financial Statements.

Basis of consolidation
(a) Subsidiaries
The Consolidated Financial Statements comprise the financial statements of the Parent Company and all its subsidiary undertakings. The accounting date 
for subsidiary undertakings is 30 April.

Subsidiaries are entities controlled by the Group. The Group controls an entity when it is exposed to, or has rights to, variable returns from its involvement 
with the entity and has the ability to affect those returns through its power over the entity. In assessing control, the Group takes into consideration potential 
voting rights that are currently exercisable. The acquisition date is the date on which control is transferred to the acquirer. The financial statements of 
subsidiaries are included in the consolidated financial statements from the date that control commences until the date that control ceases. Losses 
applicable to the non-controlling interests in a subsidiary are allocated to the non-controlling interests even if doing so causes the non-controlling interests 
to have a deficit balance.

Subsidiaries are fully consolidated from the date on which control is transferred to the Group. They are de-consolidated from the date that control ceases.

The purchase method of accounting is used to account for the acquisition of subsidiary undertakings by the Group.

Where necessary, adjustments are made to the financial statements of subsidiaries to bring the accounting policies used into line with those used by the 
Group. 

All intra-Group transactions, balances, income and expenses are eliminated on consolidation. Acquisition-related costs are expensed as incurred.

(b) Joint ventures
Joint ventures are accounted for using the equity method (equity accounted investees) and are initially recognised at cost. The Group’s investment includes 
goodwill identified on acquisition, net of any accumulated impairment losses. The consolidated financial statements include the Group’s share of the total 
comprehensive income and equity movements of equity accounted investees, from the date that joint control commences until the date that joint control 
ceases. When the Group’s share of losses exceeds its interest in an equity accounted investee, the Group’s carrying amount is reduced to nil and recognition 
of further losses is discontinued except to the extent that the Group has incurred legal or constructive obligations or made payments on behalf of an 
investee.

Segmental reporting
Operating segments are identified in a manner consistent with the internal reporting provided to the chief operating decision-maker. The Group determines 
its reportable segments having regard to permitted aggregation criteria with the principal condition being that the operating segments should have similar 
economic characteristics.

The Group is predominantly engaged in residential-led, mixed-use property development, comprising residential revenue, revenue from land sales and 
commercial revenue.

For the purposes of determining its operating segments, the chief operating decision-maker has been identified as the Executive Committee of the Board. 

This committee approves investment decisions, allocates the Group’s resources and reviews the internal reporting in order to assess performance. 

05_BERKAR15_Notes_98-120.indd   98

14/07/2015   10:24

98

berkeley AnnuAl report 2015  /  finAnciAlsThe Group has determined that its operating segments are the management teams that report into the Executive Committee of the Board. These 
management teams are all engaged in residential-led, mixed-use development in the United Kingdom and, having regard to the aggregation criteria in IFRS 
8, the Group has one reportable operating segment.

In addition to its development activities, the Group holds certain residential properties for investment purposes. These investment activities represent a 
separate segment which is included within “Other activities”, as they do not meet the size thresholds to be disclosed as a separate reportable segment.

Revenue
Revenue represents the amounts receivable from the sale of properties, investment properties and ground rent assets during the year and other income 
directly associated with property development. Properties are treated as sold and profits are recognised when contracts are exchanged and the building 
work is physically complete.  Ground rent assets are treated as sold when all material conditions precedent to the sale have been satisfied and the risks and 
rewards of ownership have transferred to the purchaser. See Accounting estimates and judgements below for further disclosures on revenue recognition.

Rental income is recognised in the income statement on a straight line basis over the life of the lease. Any lease incentives are recognised as an integral part 
of the total rental income. 

Expenditure
Expenditure recorded in inventory is expensed through cost of sales at the time of the related property sale. The amount of cost related to each property 
includes its share of the overall site costs including, where relevant, its share of forecast costs to complete. Net operating expenditure is recognised in 
respect of goods and services received when supplied in accordance with contractual terms. Provision is made when an obligation exists for a future liability 
in respect of a past event and where the amount of the obligation can be reliably estimated. See Accounting estimates and judgements below for further 
disclosures on cost recognition.

Taxation
The taxation expense represents the sum of the current tax payable and deferred tax. Current tax, including UK corporation tax, is provided at the amounts 
expected to be paid (or received) using the tax rules and laws that have been enacted, or substantively enacted, by the reporting date.

Deferred taxation is the tax expected to be payable or recoverable on differences between the carrying amounts of assets and liabilities in the financial 
statements and corresponding tax bases used in the computation of taxable profit, and is accounted for using the balance sheet liability method. Deferred 
tax liabilities are generally recognised on all taxable temporary differences. Deferred tax assets are recognised to the extent that it is probable that taxable 
profits will be available against which deductible temporary differences can be utilised. Such assets and liabilities are not recognised if the temporary 
difference arises from goodwill, or from the initial recognition (except in a business combination) of other assets and liabilities in a transaction that affects 
neither the taxable profit nor the accounting profit, or from differences relating to investments in subsidiaries to the extent that it is probable that they will 
not reverse in the foreseeable future.

Deferred taxation is calculated at the tax rates that are expected to apply in the period when the liability is settled or the asset is realised based on tax laws 
and rates that have been enacted or substantively enacted at the balance sheet date. The carrying value of deferred tax assets is reviewed at each balance 
sheet date and reduced to the extent that it is no longer probable that sufficient taxable profits will be available against which taxable temporary 
differences can be utilised. Deferred taxation is charged or credited to the income statement, except when it relates to items charged or credited directly to 
reserves, in which case the deferred taxation is also dealt with in reserves.

Deferred taxation assets and liabilities are offset when there is a legally enforceable right to offset current tax assets against current tax liabilities and when 
the deferred taxation assets and liabilities relate to income taxes levied by the same taxation authority on either the taxable entity or different taxable 
entities where there is an intention to settle the balances on a net basis.

Intangible assets
Where the cost of acquiring new and additional interests in subsidiaries, joint ventures and businesses exceeds the fair value of the net assets acquired, the 
resulting premium on acquisition (goodwill) is capitalised and its subsequent measurement is based on annual impairment reviews and impairment reviews 
performed where an impairment indicator exists, with any impairment losses recognised immediately in the income statement. Goodwill is allocated to 
cash-generating units for the purpose of impairment testing. The allocation is made to those cash-generating units or groups of cash-generating units that 
are expected to benefit from the business combination in which the goodwill arose. 

Property, plant and equipment
Property, plant and equipment is carried at historic purchase cost less accumulated depreciation. Cost includes the original purchase price of the asset and 
the costs attributable to bringing the asset to its working condition for its intended use. Depreciation is provided to write off the cost of the assets on a 
straight line basis to their residual value over their estimated useful lives at the following annual rates:

Freehold buildings 

Motor vehicles 

2% 

25% 

Fixtures and fittings 

15% / 20%

Computer equipment 

33 1/3 %

Freehold property disclosed in the notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements consists of both freehold land and freehold buildings. No depreciation is 
provided on freehold land. Computer equipment is included within fixtures and fittings. The assets’ residual values, carrying values and useful lives are 
reviewed on an annual basis and adjusted if appropriate at each balance sheet date. Where an impairment is identified, the recoverable amount of the asset 
is identified and an impairment loss, where appropriate, is recognised in the income statement.

Subsequent costs are included in the assets’ carrying amount or recognised as a separate asset, as appropriate, only when it is probable that future 
economic benefits associated with the item will flow to the Group and the cost of the item can be measured reliably. The carrying amount of the replaced 
part is derecognised. All other repairs and maintenance are charged to the income statement during the financial period in which they are incurred.

Gains and losses on disposals are determined by comparing the proceeds with the carrying amount and are recognised within net operating expenses in 
the income statement.

05_BERKAR15_Notes_98-120.indd   99

14/07/2015   10:24

99

berkeley AnnuAl report 2015  /  finAnciAlsStrategic reportgovernanceFinancialSNotes to the Consolidated Financial Statements
continued

1 Accounting policies continued
Investment properties
Investment properties, which are properties held to earn rental income, are recognised using the “cost model” and are carried in the statement of financial 
position at historic cost less accumulated depreciation.

Depreciation is provided to write off the element of the cost of the assets that relates to buildings at 2% per annum on a straight line basis. No depreciation 
is charged on the element of the cost of the assets that relates to land. 

Sales of investment properties are recognised in revenue and cost sales. These are considered to be similar in nature to the underlying property sales of the 
Group.

Inventories
Property in the course of development and completed units are valued at the lower of cost and net realisable value. Direct cost comprises the cost of land, 
raw materials and development costs but excludes indirect overheads. Provision is made, where appropriate, to reduce the value of inventories and work in 
progress to their net realisable value.

Land purchased for development, including land in the course of development, is initially recorded at cost. Where such land is purchased on deferred 
settlement terms, and the cost differs from the amount that will subsequently be paid in settling the liability, this difference is charged as a finance cost in 
the income statement over the period to settlement.

Trade and other receivables
Trade receivables are recognised initially at fair value and subsequently measured at amortised cost using the effective interest method, less provision for 
impairment. A provision for impairment of trade receivables is established when there is objective evidence that the Group will not be able to collect all 
amounts due according to the original terms of the receivables. The amount of the provision is the difference between the asset’s carrying amount and the 
present value of estimated future cash flows, discounted at the original effective interest rate. The carrying amount of the asset is reduced through the use 
of an allowance account, and the amount of the loss is recognised in the income statement within net operating expenses. When a trade receivable is 
uncollectible, it is written off against the allowance account for trade receivables. Subsequent recoveries of amounts previously written off are credited 
against net operating expense in the income statement.

Cash and cash equivalents
Cash and cash equivalents comprises cash balances in hand and at the bank, including bank overdrafts repayable on demand which form part of the 
Group’s cash management, for which offset arrangements across Group businesses have been applied where appropriate.

Share capital
Ordinary shares are classified as equity. 

Incremental costs directly attributable to the issue of new shares or options are shown in equity as a deduction, net of tax, from the proceeds.

Where any Group company purchases the Company’s equity share capital (treasury shares), the consideration paid, including any directly attributable 
incremental costs (net of income taxes) is deducted from equity attributable to the Company’s equity holders until the shares are cancelled, sold or 
reissued. Where such shares are subsequently sold or reissued, any consideration received, net of any directly attributable incremental transaction costs and 
the related income tax effects, is included in equity attributable to the Company’s equity holders.

Borrowings
Borrowings are recognised initially at fair value, net of transaction costs incurred. Any difference between the proceeds (net of transaction costs) and the 
redemption value is recognised in the income statement over the period of the borrowings using the effective interest method.

Trade and other payables
Trade and other payables on normal terms are not interest bearing and are stated at their nominal value which is considered to be their fair value. Trade 
payables on extended terms are recorded at their fair value at the date of acquisition of the asset to which they relate. The discount to nominal value is 
amortised over the period of the credit term and charged to finance costs.

Provisions
Provisions are recognised when the Group has a present legal or constructive obligation as a result of past events, and it is probable that an outflow of 
resources will be required to settle that obligation, and the amount has been reliably estimated. See Accounting estimates and judgements below for further 
disclosures on recognition of provisions.

Deposits
New property deposits and on account contract receipts are held within current trade and other payables.

Employee benefits
(a) Pensions
The Group accounts for pensions under IAS 19 “Employee benefits”. The Group has both defined benefit and defined contribution plans. The defined 
benefit plan was closed to future accrual with effect from 1 April 2007.

For the defined benefit scheme, the obligations are measured using the projected unit method. The calculation of the net obligation is performed by a 
qualified actuary. The operating and financing costs of these plans are recognised separately in the income statement; service costs are set annually on the 
basis of actuarial valuations of the scheme and financing costs are recognised in the period in which they arise. Actuarial gains and losses are recognised 
immediately in the statement of comprehensive income. In accordance with IAS 19 the Group does not recognise on the statement of financial position any 
surplus in the scheme.

Pension contributions under defined contribution schemes are charged to the income statement as they fall due.

(b) Share-based payments

Equity-settled
Where the Company operates equity-settled, share-based compensation plans, the fair value of the employee services received in exchange for the grant of 
the options is recognised as an expense. The total amount to be expensed over the vesting period is determined by reference to the fair value of the options 
granted, taking into account only service and non-market conditions.

100

05_BERKAR15_Notes_98-120.indd   100

14/07/2015   10:24

berkeley AnnuAl report 2015  /  finAnciAlsAt each balance sheet date, the Group revises its estimates of the number of options that are expected to vest. It recognises the impact of the revision to 
original estimates, if any, in the income statement, with a corresponding adjustment to equity.

The proceeds received net of any directly attributable transaction costs are credited to share capital (nominal value) and share premium when the options 
are exercised. 

Cash-settled
The cost of cash settled transactions is recognised as an expense over the vesting period measured by reference to the fair value of the corresponding 
liability which is recognised on the balance sheet.  The liability is remeasured at fair value at each balance sheet date until settlement with changes in fair 
value recognised in the income statement.

During the year, the Company changed its policy for the accounting of equity-settled share-based payment schemes in the event that such schemes are 
modified, in full or in part, to become cash settled. The effect of this change in policy has been to recognise a charge in the income statement of £47.0 
million, which previously would have been debited directly to reserves. This related to the modification of the basis of settlement for a proportion of the 
awards under Part B of the 2009 LTIP which was undertaken in the year. The effect on basic earnings per share in the year was a reduction of 34.7 pence. 
There is no impact of this change in accounting policy on the prior years presented in the financial statements, nor in those years presented in the five year 
record. 

See Accounting estimates and judgements below for further disclosures on recognition of share based payments.

Dividends
Dividend distributions to shareholders are recognised as a liability in the period in which the dividends are appropriately authorised and approved for 
payout and are no longer at the discretion of the Company. Unpaid dividends that do not meet these criteria are disclosed in the notes to the financial 
statements.

Leasing agreements
Payments and receipts under operating lease agreements are charged or credited against profit on a straight line basis over the life of the lease.

Accounting estimates and judgements
Management applies the Group’s accounting policies as described above when making critical accounting judgements, of which no individual judgement is 
deemed to have a significant impact upon the financial statements, apart from those involving estimations, which are detailed below.

(a) Carrying value of land and work in progress and estimation of costs to complete
The Group holds inventories stated at the lower of cost and net realisable value. Such inventories include land, work in progress and completed units. As 
residential development is largely speculative by nature, not all inventories are covered by forward sales contracts. Furthermore due to the nature of the 
Group’s activity and, in particular the scale of its developments and the length of the development cycle, the Group has to allocate site-wide development 
costs between units being built and/or completed in the current year and those for future years. It also has to assess the risks and forecast the costs in 
future years to complete on such developments.

In making such assessments and allocations, there is a degree of inherent estimation uncertainty. The Group has established internal controls designed to 
effectively assess and centrally review inventory carrying values and ensure the appropriateness of the estimates made.

(b) Provisions
The Group makes assumptions to determine the timing and its best estimate of the quantum of its construction and other liabilities for which provisions are 
held.

(c) Revenue recognition
Assumptions are made which complement external certifications to assess whether the building work for properties sold is physically complete and legal 
completion is highly probable and hence whether the Group’s revenue recognition criteria have been satisfied.

(d) Share-based payments
Assumptions are made in determining the fair value of employee services received in exchange for the grant of options under share-based payment awards 
at the date of grant.

2 Segmental disclosure
For the purposes of determining its operating segments, the chief operating decision-maker has been identified as the Executive Committee of the Board. 
This committee approves investment decisions, allocates the Group’s resources and reviews the internal reporting in order to assess performance. 

The Group has determined that its operating segments are the management teams that report into the Executive Committee of the Board. These 
management teams are all engaged in residential-led, mixed-use development in the United Kingdom and, having regard to the aggregation criteria in IFRS 
8, the Group has one reportable operating segment.

In addition to its development activities, the Group holds certain residential properties for investment purposes. These investment activities represent a 
separate segment which is included within other activities as it does not meet the size thresholds to be disclosed as separate reportable segments. Revenue 
and operating profit for the year ended 30 April 2015 included £8.3 million and £1.3 million, respectively, on the sale of 53 other investment properties. 
Revenue and operating profit for the year ended 30 April 2014 included £105.4 million and £29.6 million, respectively, on the sale of 534 properties to M&G 
Investments and £32.8 million and £13.6 million, respectively, on the sale of 141 other investment properties.

05_BERKAR15_Notes_98-120.indd   101

14/07/2015   10:24

101

berkeley AnnuAl report 2015  /  finAnciAlsStrategic reportgovernanceFinancialSNotes to the Consolidated Financial Statements
continued

2 Segmental disclosure continued
Segment results 

Profit before tax

Residential-led mixed-use development 

Other activities 

2015 
£m 

539.4 
0.3 
539.7 

2014 
£m

379.7

0.3

380.0

Segment profit before tax represents the profit before tax allocated to each segment. This is the measure reported to the Executive Committee of the 
Board for the purpose of resource allocation and assessment of segment performance.  Segmental profit before tax on other activities is stated after 
charging external and intercompany interest and depreciation.

Segment assets 

Assets

Residential-led mixed-use development 

Other activities 

2015 
£m 

3,406. 1  
0.2 
3,406.3 

2014 
£m 

2,943. 1

7.2

2,950.3

For the purpose of monitoring segment performance and allocating resources between segments all assets are considered to be attributable to 
residential-led mixed-use development with the exception of investment properties which are held for the Group’s investing activities and have therefore 
been allocated to other activities.

3 Disposal of ground rent assets
During the year end 30 April 2015, the Group sold a portfolio of ground rent assets for consideration of £99.8 million and a gross profit of £85. 1 million. 
Income and expenses associated with this sale have been recognised in the income statement through revenue and gross profit in accordance with the 
Group’s accounting policy for revenue and expenditure.

The Group has exchanged contracts for the sale of a further portfolio of ground rent assets for £53 million. The sale is expected to give rise to a profit on 
disposal of approximately £50 million after transaction costs in the year ending 30 April 2016.  The sale will be recognised in the income statement through 
revenue and profit in accordance with the Group’s accounting policy for revenue and expenditure.

4 Net finance costs

Finance income 

Finance costs:

Interest payable on bank loans and non-utilisation fees 

Amortisation of facility fees 

Other finance costs 

Net finance costs 

2015 
£m 
3.0 

(4.8) 
(5.7) 
(5.2) 
(15.7) 
(12.7) 

2014 
£m

3.4

(5.1)

(1.3)

(3.9)

(10.3)

(6.9)

Finance income predominantly represents interest earned on cash deposits.

Amortisation of facility fees includes fees expensed in relation to a refinancing of the Group’s revolving credit facilities in 2012 which was superseded by the 
recent refinancing of the facilities in 2015.  See note 26 for further information.

Other finance costs represent imputed interest on taxation and on land purchased on deferred settlement terms.

05_BERKAR15_Notes_98-120.indd   102

14/07/2015   10:24

102

berkeley AnnuAl report 2015  /  finAnciAls 
 
 
 
 
 
 
5 Profit before taxation
Profit before taxation is stated after charging/(crediting) the following amounts:

Staff costs (note 6) 

Depreciation of property, plant and equipment (note 10) 

Loss on sale of fixed assets 

Profit on sale of investment properties 

Rental income from investment properties 

Direct operating expense in relation to investment properties including depreciation 

Operating lease costs  

Fees paid and payable to the Company’s previous auditor for other services:

– Audit related assurance services 

Fees paid and payable to the Company’s current auditor for the audit of the Parent Company  

and consolidated financial statements

Fees paid and payable to the Company’s current auditor for other services:

– Audit of the Company’s subsidiaries 

– Audit related assurance services 

– Taxation advisory services 

2015 
£m 
270.3 
2.7 
0.2 
(1.3) 
(0. 1) 
0. 1 
2.6 

– 
0.2 

0. 1 
0. 1 
0. 1 

2014 
 £m 

177.3

1.9

0.7

(43.2)

(0.9)

0.2

2.7

0. 1

0.2

0. 1

–

0. 1

The value of inventories expensed and included in the cost of sales is £1,325.4m (2014: £1,032.9m).

In addition to the above services, the Group’s current auditor has been asked to act as auditor to The Berkeley Final Salary Plan. The appointment of 
auditors to the Group’s pension scheme and the fees paid in respect of the audit are agreed by the trustees of the scheme, who act independently of the 
management of the Group. The fees paid to the Group’s auditors for audit services to the pension scheme during the year were £10,000 (2014: £nil).

Fees paid in the year to the Group’s current auditor for audit-related assurance services relate to the interim review. In the prior year, fees paid to the Group’s 
current auditor for other services disclosed in the table above relate only to the period from the date of appointment of 6 December 2013. Fees paid in 
respect of the full year ended 30 April 2014 were £0.1 million for taxation advisory services and £0. 1  million for all other non-audit services. 

In the prior year, remuneration paid to the Group’s previous auditors in respect of audit related assurance services relates to the interim review.

6 Directors and employees

Staff costs

Wages and salaries 

Social security costs 

Share-based payments 

Pension costs  

2015 
£m 

176.7 
32.8 
55.5 
5.3 
270.3 

2014 
£m 

141.8

28.5

3.3

3.7

177.3

The average monthly number of persons employed by the Group during the year was 2,045 (2014: 1,647).

Key management compensation
Key management comprises the Main Board, as the Directors are considered to have the authority and responsibility for planning, directing and controlling 
the activities of the Group. Details of Directors’ emoluments as included in the Income Statement during the year are as follows:

Directors’ remuneration 

Amounts charged under the long term incentive scheme 

Company contributions to the defined contribution pension schemes 

Payments for loss of office 

2015 
£m 
3.8 
41.7 
0.1 
0.5 
46.1 

2014 
£m

3.5

13.1

0.1

–

16.7

The Directors’ Remuneration Report includes disclosure of the gains made by Directors on the exercise of share options during the year, which was £35.0 
million in aggregate.

During the year the Company dismissed its finance director, Mr Nicolas Simpkin, who is currently on fully paid garden leave ending on 23 September 2015. 
Mr Simpkin has issued legal proceedings against the Company arising from his employment and its termination. These proceedings were received by the 
Company on 12 December 2014 and 25 June 2015. The Company is defending the proceedings with the assistance of external legal advisers. 

103

05_BERKAR15_Notes_98-120.indd   103

14/07/2015   10:24

berkeley AnnuAl report 2015  /  finAnciAlsStrategic reportgovernanceFinancialS 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements
continued

6 Directors and employees continued
Equity-settled share-based payments
The Group operates two equity-settled share based payments schemes. The charge to the income statement in respect of share-based payments in the 
year relating to grants of share options awarded under the 2009 Long-Term Incentive Plan and the 2011 Long-Term Incentive Plan was £55.5m (2014: 
£9.0m). The charge of £55.5m in 2015 includes £47.0m, of which £33.5m relates to the modification of the basis of settlement and £13.5m relates to the fair 
value charge for the current year, in respect of the Company’s decision to offer to pay the income tax and national insurance liabilities of participants under 
Part B of the 2009 Long-Term Incentive Plan in lieu of issuing shares of an equivalent value to them. This effectively determined the part of the scheme to 
be accounted for on a cash-settlement basis, which is explained further below. The decision and the resultant income statement charge relates to options 
vesting at both 15 April 2015 and 15 April 2016. The charge to the income statement attributable to key management is £33.0m (2014: £2.3m).

There were no exercisable share options at the end of the year.

2009 Long-Term Incentive Plan
Part B
Part B of the 2009 Long-Term Incentive Plan covers 6,830,000 (2014: 6,830,000) share options with an exercise price of £4.96. Vesting of the options is in 
two tranches: 50% on 15 April 2015 and 50% on 15 April 2016. The options are conditional on continued employment at the relevant vesting date and the 
satisfaction of the underpin condition that Net Assets per Share are at least £9.00 at 15 April 2015 and 15 April 2016. During the year, 280,000 options 
lapsed on the departure of employees (2014: 30,000) prior to the shares vesting on 15 April 2015, leaving 5,810,000 options to vest. In accordance with the 
scheme, 50% of these options became exercisable by the relevant employees on 15 April 2015. As a result, 2,384,943 shares were issuable to the 
participants, representing 2,905,000 options that vested under 2009 LTIP Part B, less 520,057 of shares equivalent to the exercise price on vesting of £4.96 
per share, where the exercise price was not settled in cash by the participants. The Company elected to enable participants to choose to allow the 
Company to settle the income tax and national insurance liabilities of the participants of the Scheme in lieu of issuing shares to them for an equivalent value. 
This reduced the number of shares issuable by a further 1,078,300 to 1,306,643 which were issued on 15 April 2015. The share price at the date of vesting 
was £27.11. As at 30 April 2015 there were 2,905,000 options outstanding (2014: 6,090,000), and there was £23.7 million carrying amount of liabilities in 
respect of these options.

2011 Long-Term Incentive Plan
The Company announced in June 2011 as part of a strategic review of the business a long term plan to return approximately £1.7 billion to shareholders over 
the next 10 years. The rules were subsequently amended and approved at the 2012 Annual General Meeting to allow the returns to be made through a 
combination of dividends (£13 per share) and share buy backs (‘distributions’). The cumulative distributions required by the plan on or before the relative 
milestone dates are set out below:

30 September 2015  

30 September 2018  

30 September 2021  

Cumulative distributions

£4.34 per share

£4.33 per share

£4.33 per share

A long term remuneration plan was proposed to support this strategy, the 2011 Long Term Incentive Plan (“2011 LTIP”), which was approved by shareholders 
at the Annual General Meeting on 5 September 2011 and the amendment at the Annual General Meeting on 5 September 2012. The key features of the 2011 
LTIP are:

–  if the Company returns £1.7 billion to shareholders over a ten year period via a series of dividend payments (£13 per share) and share buy backs by the 
milestone dates referred to above, participants will be entitled to exercise options and receive a number of ordinary shares in the capital of the Company at 
the end of the ten year period.

–  the maximum number of shares capable of being earned by all participants are 19,616,503 shares, being 13% of the fully diluted share capital of the 
Company at the date of approval of the plan.

–  the exercise price of options granted under the 2011 LTIP will be £13 per share less an amount equal to the value of all dividends paid between the date of 
approval of the 2011 LTIP and 30 September 2021, provided the exercise price cannot be less than zero.

The fair value of the options granted during that year, determined using the current market pricing model, was £3.17 for options which vest on 30 
September 2021. The inputs into the current market option pricing model were:

Grant date 

Vesting date 

Share price at grant date (p) 

Exercise price (p) 

Discount rate 

Inputs

5 September 2011

30 September 2021

1,236

nil

6.3%

The discount rate was determined by calculating the Group’s expected cost of capital over the vesting period at the grant date.

Cash-settled share-based payments
Bonus Plan.
Under the Bonus Plan, in the Directors’ Remuneration Report on page 76, the balance on the plan account at the end of the financial year was the final 
balance and has been settled 50% in cash and 50% in shares. 

The liability has been accrued over the vesting period. The income statement is charged with an estimate for the vesting of notional shares awarded subject 
to service and non-market performance conditions. The charge for 2015 was £8.7m (2014: £10.8m).

The total carrying amount of liabilities for the Bonus Plan at the end of the year was £13. 1 m (2014: £11.4m).

104

05_BERKAR15_Notes_98-120.indd   104

14/07/2015   10:24

berkeley AnnuAl report 2015  /  finAnciAls 
 
Senior Management share appreciation rights
Certain key members of senior management and staff have been awarded cash bonuses deferred in notional shares in the Company. The notional shares 
have a contractual life of five years after the bonus is allocated, and are settled in cash subject to continued employment by the Company and individual 
and divisional performance criteria.

The liability is accrued over the vesting period. The income statement is charged with an estimate for the vesting of notional shares awarded subject to 
service and non-market performance conditions. The charge for 2015 was £13.7m (2014: £6.9m).

The total carrying amount of liabilities for share appreciation rights at the end of the year was £26.7m (2014: £13.0m).

Pensions
During the year, two principal pension schemes were in place for employees. The Berkeley Group plc Group Personal Pension Plan and the St George PLC 
Group Personal Pension Plan are defined contribution schemes. The assets of these schemes were held in separate trustee administered funds.

The Berkeley Final Salary Plan is a defined benefit scheme which was closed to future accrual with effect from 1 April 2007.

Defined contribution plan
Contributions amounting to £4.5m (2014: £3.3m) were paid into the defined contribution schemes during the year.

Defined benefit plan
As at 30 April 2015, the Group operated one defined benefit pension scheme which was closed to future accrual with effect from 1 April 2007. This is a 
separate trustee administered fund holding the pension plan assets to meet long term pension liabilities for some 335 past employees. The level of 
retirement benefit is principally based on salary earned in the last three years of employment prior to leaving active service and is linked to changes in 
inflation up to retirement.

The Berkeley Final Salary Plan is subject to an independent actuarial valuation at least every three years. The most recently finalised valuation was carried 
out as at 1 May 2013 and finalised in December 2013. The method adopted in the 2013 valuation was the projected unit method, which assumed a return on 
investment both prior to and after retirement of 4.00% per annum and pension increases of 3.25% per annum. The market value of the Berkeley Final Salary 
Plan assets as at 1 May 2013 was £16.2m and covered 97% of the scheme’s liabilities. Following the finalisation of the 2007 valuation, with effect from 1 July 
2008, employer’s required regular contributions were reduced to zero. Following the finalisation of the 2013 valuation, the Group agreed with the Trustees 
of the Scheme to make additional contributions to the Scheme of £0.2m for the remainder of the year (1 December 2013 to 30 April 2014) to address the 
Scheme’s deficit after which required contributions were reduced to zero.  Notwithstanding this the Group made additional voluntary contributions of 
£0.5m during the year (2014: £0.6m). 

For the purposes of IAS 19, the 2013 valuation was updated for 30 April 2015.

The most significant risks to which the plan exposes the group are:

Inflation risk: A rise in inflation rates will lead to higher plan liabilities as a large proportion of the defined benefit obligation is indexed in line with price 
inflation. This effect will be limited due to caps on inflationary increases to protect the plan against extreme inflation.

Interest rate risk: A decrease in corporate bond yields would result in an increase to plan liabilities although this effect would be partially offset by an 
increase in the value of the plan’s bond holdings.

Mortality risk: An increase in life expectancy would result in an increase to plan liabilities as a significant proportion of the Pension Schemes’ obligations are 
to provide benefits for the life of the member.

The amounts recognised in the statement of financial position are determined as follows:

Present value of defined benefit obligations 

Fair value of plan assets 

Net surplus 

Effect of the asset ceiling 

Net amount recognised on the statement of financial position 

2015  
£m  
(16.6) 
18. 1  
1.5 
(1.5) 
– 

2014 
£m

(14.8)

16.0

1.2

(1.2)

–

05_BERKAR15_Notes_98-120.indd   105

14/07/2015   10:24

105

berkeley AnnuAl report 2015  /  finAnciAlsStrategic reportgovernanceFinancialS 
 
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements
continued

6 Directors and employees continued
Movement in net defined benefit asset:

Balance at 1 May 

Included in income statement 

Net interest 

Included in other comprehensive income 

Remeasurements: 

Actuarial (loss)/gain arising from: 

– demographic assumptions 

– financial assumptions 

– experience adjustments 

Return on plan assets 

(excluding interest income)

Other 

Contributions by the employer 

Benefits paid out 

Balance at 30 April 

Defined Benefit Obligation 

Fair Value Plan Assets 

Net Defined Benefit Asset

2015 
£m 
(14.8) 

2014 
£m 

(14.6) 

2015 
£m 
16.0 

2014 
£m 

16.0 

2015 
£m 
1.2 

2014 
£m

1.4

(0.6) 

(0.6) 

0.7 

0.6 

0. 1  

–

– 
(1.8) 
0. 1  

– 

– 
0.5 
(16.6) 

– 

(0. 1 ) 

0. 1  

– 
– 
– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

1.4 

(0.8) 

– 

0.4 

(14.8) 

0.5 
(0.5) 
18. 1  

0.6 

(0.4) 

16.0 

Cumulative actuarial gains and losses recognised in equity:

Cumulative amounts of losses recognised in the statement of comprehensive income at 1 May 

Net actuarial losses recognised in the year 

Change in the effect of the asset ceiling 

Cumulative amounts of losses recognised in the statement of comprehensive income at 30 April 

The fair value of the assets were as follows:

UK Equities 

Global Equities 

Emerging Market Equities 

Emerging Market Debt 

High Yield Bonds 

Diversified Growth Fund 

Property 

Government Bonds (over 15 years) 

Government Bonds (5 to 15 years) 

Index Linked Gilts (over 5 years) 

Corporate Bonds 

Cash 

Fair value of plan assets 

– 
(1.8) 
0. 1 

1.4 

0.5 
– 
1.5 

2015  
£m  
(5.0) 
(0.3) 
(0.3) 
(5.6) 

–

(0. 1 )

0. 1

(0.8)

0.6

–

1.2

2014 
£m

(4.4)

(0.8)

0.2

(5.0)

30 April 2015 
Long-term 
Value 
£m 
0.8 
3. 1  
1.4 
0.9 
0.9 
3.0 
1.7 
0.9 
1.7 
1.9 
1.3 
0.5 
18. 1  

30 April 2014 
Long-term 
Value 
£m

0.8

3.0

0.7

1.3

0.9

2.9

1.5

1.6

0.8

–

2.3

0.2

16.0

All equity securities and government bonds have quoted prices in active markets. All government bonds are issued by European governments and are 
AAA- or AA- rated. All other plan assets are not quoted in an active market.

05_BERKAR15_Notes_98-120.indd   106

14/07/2015   10:24

106

berkeley AnnuAl report 2015  /  finAnciAls 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
History of asset values

Fair value of scheme assets 

Present value of scheme liabilities 

Net surplus in the plan 

30 April 
2015 
£m 
18. 1  
(16.6) 
1.5 

30 April 
2014 
£m 

16.0 

(14.8) 

1.2 

30 April 
2013 
£m 

16.0 

(14.6) 

1.4 

30 April 
2012 
£m 

14.0 

(13.3) 

0.7 

Actuarial assumptions
The major assumptions used by the actuary for the 30 April 2015 valuation were:

Valuation at: 

Discount rate 

Inflation assumption (RPI) 

Inflation assumption (CPI) 

Rate of increase in pensions in payment post-97 (Pre-97 receive 3% p.a. increases) 

30 April 
2015 
3.50% 
3.30% 
2.40% 
3.30% 

30 April 
2011 
£m 

12.8

(12.4)

0.4

30 April 
2014

4.30%

3.40%

2.50%

3.40%

The mortality assumptions are the standard S1PA CMI_2014_X [1.0%] (2014: S1PA CMI_2009_X [1.0%]) base table for males and females, both adjusted for 
each individual’s year of birth to allow for future improvements in mortality rates. The life expectancy of male and female pensioners (now aged 65) retiring 
at age 65 on the balance sheet date is 22.0 years and 24.3 years respectively (2014: 22.0 and 24.2). The life expectancy of male and female deferred 
pensioners (now aged 50) retiring at age 65 after the balance sheet date is 23.7 years and 26.1 years respectively (2014: 23.0 and 25.3).

Sensitivity Analysis
The calculation of the defined benefit obligation is sensitive to the assumptions set out above. The following table summarises how the impact on the 
defined benefit obligation at the end of the reporting period would have increased as a result of a change in the respective assumptions.

Discount rate 

Rate of inflation 

Rate of mortality 

Change in 
Change in   defined benefit 
obligation

Assumption 

-0.25% p.a 

+0.25% p.a 

+ 1 year 

+4.2%

+2.9%

+3.0%

These calculations provide an approximate guide to the sensitivity of results and may not be as accurate as a full valuation carried out on these 
assumptions. In practice, changes in some of the assumptions are correlated and so each assumption change is unlikely to occur in isolation, as shown 
above.

Funding
The Group expects to pay £0.6m in contributions to its defined benefit plan in the year ending 30 April 2016 (i.e. the next annual reporting period), albeit it 
has no obligation to do so.

7 Taxation
The tax charge for the year is as follows:

Current tax

UK corporation tax payable 

Adjustments in respect of previous years 

Deferred tax at 20% (note 19) (2014: 21%) 

Tax on items recognised directly in other comprehensive income is as follows:

Deferred tax on remeasurements of the net defined benefit asset/liability (note 19) 

107

2015  
£m  

(130.2) 
4.8 
(125.4) 
9.2 
(116.2) 

2015  
£m  
0. 1  

2014 
£m

(94.3)

(4.0)

(98.3)

11.2

(87. 1)

2014 
£m

0. 1

05_BERKAR15_Notes_98-120.indd   107

14/07/2015   10:24

berkeley AnnuAl report 2015  /  finAnciAlsStrategic reportgovernanceFinancialS 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements
continued

7 Taxation continued
Tax on items recognised directly in equity is as follows:

Deferred tax in respect of employee share schemes (note 19) 

Current tax in respect of employee share schemes (note 19) 

2015  
£m  
13. 1  
(11.5) 
1.6 

2014 
£m

17.3

(23. 1)

(5.8)

The tax charge assessed for the year differs from the standard rate of UK corporation tax of 20.92% (2014: 22.84%). The differences are explained below:

Profit before tax 

Tax on profit at standard UK corporation tax rate 

Effects of: 

Expenses not deductible for tax purposes 

Tax effect of share of results of joint ventures 

Adjustments in respect of previous periods  

Prior year adjustment in respect of change of tax rate from 23% to 21%/20% (note 19) 

Utilisation of losses 

Other 

Tax charge  

2015  
£m  
539.7 
113.2 

0.5 
0.9 
1.9 
– 
– 
(0.3) 
116.2 

2014 
£m

380.0

86.8

0.5

0. 1

4.0

5.3

(0.8)

(8.8)

87. 1

Corporation tax is calculated at 20.92% (11 months at 21%, 1 month at 20%) of the estimated assessable profit for the year.

The adjustments in respect of previous years includes items such as the earlier recognition of costs in the statutory accounts and other timing differences 
that are not individually significant and have not therefore been separately disclosed. 

8 Earnings per ordinary share
Basic earnings per ordinary share is calculated as profit for the financial year attributable to shareholders of the Group divided by the weighted average 
number of shares in issue during the year.

Profit attributable to shareholders (£m) 

Weighted average number of shares (m) 

Basic earnings per ordinary share (p) 

2015 
423.5 
135.3 
313.0 

2014

292.9

132. 1

221.8

For diluted earnings per ordinary share, the weighted average number of shares in issue is adjusted to assume the conversion of all potentially dilutive 
ordinary shares. At 30 April 2015, the Group had three (2014: three) categories of potentially dilutive ordinary shares: 2.9 million £4.96 share options under 
the 2009 LTIP Part B, 16. 1 million (2014: 19.6 million) £nil share options under the 2011 LTIP and 0.5 million (2014: nil) share options under the Bonus Banking 
plan.  2.9 million share options vested on 15 April 2015 under the 2009 LTIP Part B scheme and 1.3 million were issued to participants, with the Company 
settling the option price and participants’ tax liability in respect of the balance, in lieu of issuing shares.  In 2014, 4.4 million share options vested and were 
issued on 31 January 2014 under the Part A of the 2009 LTIP scheme.

A calculation is done to determine the number of shares that could have been acquired at fair value based on the aggregate of the exercise price of each 
share option and the fair value of future services to be supplied to the Group which is the unamortised share-based payments charge. The difference 
between the number of shares that could have been acquired at fair value and the total number of options is used in the diluted earnings per share 
calculation. 

Profit used to determine diluted EPS (£m) 

Weighted average number of shares (m)  

Adjustments for:  

Share options – 2009 LTIP Part A (m)  

Share options – 2009 LTIP Part B (m)  

Share options – 2011 LTIP (m) 

Bonus plan shares 

Shares used to determine diluted EPS (m)  

Diluted earnings per ordinary share (p)  

2015 
423.5 
135.3 

– 
3.5 
13.6 
0.5 
152.9 
276.9 

2014

292.9

132. 1

3.0

4.0

16.4

–

155.5

188.4

05_BERKAR15_Notes_98-120.indd   108

14/07/2015   10:24

108

berkeley AnnuAl report 2015  /  finAnciAls 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
9 Intangible assets

Cost

At 1 May 2014 and 30 April 2015 

Accumulated impairment 

At 1 May 2014 and at 30 April 2015 

Net book value 

At 1 May 2014 and at 30 April 2015 

Cost

At 1 May 2013 and 30 April 2014 

Accumulated impairment

At 1 May 2013 and at 30 April 2014 

Net book value

At 1 May 2013 and at 30 April 2014 

Goodwill 
£m 

17.2

–

17.2

17.2

–

17.2

The goodwill balance relates solely to the acquisition of the 50% of the ordinary share capital of St James Group Limited, completed on 7 November 2006, 
that was not already owned by the Group. The goodwill balance on St James Group Limited Cash Generating Unit is tested annually for impairment. The 
recoverable amount has been determined on the basis of the value in use of the business using the current five year pre-tax forecasts. Key assumptions are 
as follows:

(i) Cash flows beyond a five year period are not extrapolated;

(ii) A pre-tax discount rate of 12.06% (2014: 13.21%) based on the Group’s weighted average cost of capital.

The Directors have identified no reasonably possible change in a key assumption which would give rise to an impairment charge.

05_BERKAR15_Notes_98-120.indd   109

14/07/2015   10:24

109

berkeley AnnuAl report 2015  /  finAnciAlsStrategic reportgovernanceFinancialS 
 
 
 
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements
continued

10 Property, plant and equipment and investment property

Property, plant and equipment

Cost 

At 1 May 2014 

Additions 

Disposals 

At 30 April 2015 

Accumulated depreciation

At 1 May 2014 

Charge for the year  

Disposals 

At 30 April 2015 

Net book value

At 1 May 2014 

At 30 April 2015 

Cost 

At 1 May 2013 

Additions 

Disposals 

At 30 April 2014 

Accumulated depreciation

At 1 May 2013 

Charge for the year  

Disposals 

At 30 April 2014 

Net book value

At 1 May 2013 

At 30 April 2014 

Freehold 
property 
£m 

Fixtures and 
fittings 
£m 

Motor 
vehicles 
£m 

16.3 

0.3 

– 

16.6 

0.7 

0.3 

– 

1.0 

15.6 

15.6 

6.0 

2.9 

(0.2) 

8.7 

2.3 

1.7 

(0.2) 

3.8 

3.7 

4.9 

4.0 

1.4 

(0.9) 

4.5 

1.3 

0.7 

(0.5) 

1.5 

2.7 

3.0 

Total 
£m 

26.3 

4.6 

(1. 1) 

29.8 

4.3 

2.7 

(0.7) 

6.3 

22.0 

23.5 

 Investment 
 properties 
£m 

7.5

–

(7.3)

0.2

0.3

–

(0.3)

–

7.2

0.2

Property, plant and equipment

Freehold 
property 
£m 

Fixtures and 
fittings 
£m 

Motor 
vehicles 
£m 

Total 
£m 

 Investment 
 properties 
£m 

1 1. 1  

5.2 

– 

16.3 

0.5 

0.2 

– 

0.7 

10.6 

15.6 

8.8 

2.2 

(5.0) 

6.0 

5.3 

1. 1  

(4. 1) 

2.3 

3.5 

3.7 

3.5 

1.5 

(1.0) 

4.0 

1.3 

0.6 

(0.6) 

1.3 

2.2 

2.7 

23.4 

8.9 

(6.0) 

26.3 

7. 1  

1.9 

(4.7) 

4.3 

16.3 

22.0 

27.4

–

(19.9)

7.5

0.9

0. 1

(0.7)

0.3

26.5

7.2

The market value of the investment properties held at 30 April 2015 is £0.3m (30 April 2014: £10.3m) as determined by the Directors taking into account all 
relevant factors including their nature and location. No independent valuation was undertaken.

05_BERKAR15_Notes_98-120.indd   110

14/07/2015   10:24

110

berkeley AnnuAl report 2015  /  finAnciAls 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
11 Investments accounted for using the equity method

Unlisted shares at cost 

Loans 

Share of post-acquisition reserves 

Elimination of profit on transfer of inventory to joint ventures 

Details of the principal joint ventures are provided in note 28.

The movement on the investments accounted for using the equity method during the year is as follows:

At 1 May 

Profit after tax for the year 

Dividends from investments 

Net (decrease)/increase in loans to joint ventures 

At 30 April 

Net (decrease)/increase in loans to joint ventures includes movements in unlisted shares at cost.

The Group’s share of joint ventures’ net assets, income and expenses is made up as follows:

Current assets 

Current liabilities 

Non-current liabilities 

Revenue 

Costs 

Operating profit 

Interest charges 

Profit/(loss) before taxation 

Tax charge 

Share of post tax profit/(loss) of joint ventures 

12 Other investments
Other investments comprise available-for-sale financial assets.

At 1 May 

Additions 

Fair value adjustment taken through other comprehensive income 

At 30 April 

2015 
£m 
11.0 
15.7 
23.9 
(0.5) 
50. 1  

2015 
£m 
61.4 
28.3 
(12.3) 
(27.3) 
50. 1  

2015 
£m 
196. 1 
(92.4) 
(53.6) 
50. 1  

141.5 
(111. 1) 
30.4 
(1.9) 
28.5 
(0.2) 
28.3 

2015 
£m 
11.0 
– 
1.0 
12.0 

2014 
£m

12. 1

41.9

7.9

(0.5)

61.4

2014 
£m

44. 1

12. 1

–

5.2

61.4

2014 
£m

180.4

(82.5)

(36.5)

61.4

125.6

(112. 1)

13.5

(1.2)

12.3

(0.2)

12. 1

2014 
£m

–

10.0

1.0

11.0

As at 30 April 2015, the Group held 100,000 units (2014: 100,000 units) in a fund into which in 2014 the Group sold 534 rental properties. In accordance 
with IFRS 7 ‘Financial Instruments: Disclosures’, these financial assets have been classified as Level 2 within the fair value hierarchy. Level 2 fair value 
measurements are those that are derived from inputs other than quoted prices included within level 1 that are observable for the asset (that is, as prices) or 
indirectly (that is, derived from prices). 

On 30 April 2015, based on inputs other than quoted prices, the units had a market value of £12.0m (2014: £11.0m). A gain of £1.0m (2014: £1.0m) has been 
recognised in the consolidated statement of comprehensive income for the year ended 30 April 2015.

Further disclosures relating to financial assets are set out in note 26. 

05_BERKAR15_Notes_98-120.indd   111

14/07/2015   10:24

111

berkeley AnnuAl report 2015  /  finAnciAlsStrategic reportgovernanceFinancialS 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements
continued

13 Inventories

Land not under development 

Work in progress 

Completed units 

14 Trade and other receivables

Trade receivables 

Other receivables 

Prepayments and accrued income 

Further disclosures relating to trade receivables are set out in note 26.

15 Cash and cash equivalents

Cash and cash equivalents 

16 Borrowings

Current

Bank loans 

Further disclosures relating to current and non-current loans are set out in note 26.

17 Trade and other payables

Current

Trade payables 

Deposits and on account contract receipts 

Loans from joint ventures 

Other taxes and social security 

Accruals and deferred income 

Non-current

Trade payables 

Total trade and other payables 

2015 
£m 
342.0 
2,280.2 
31.9 
2,654. 1  

2015 
£m 
123.9 
13.7 
8.0 
145.6 

2015 
£m 
430.9 

2015 
£m 

– 
– 

2015 
£m 

(391.9) 
(920.9) 
(0. 1) 
(39.4) 
(151.5) 
(1,503.8) 

(131.7) 
(1,635.5) 

2014 
£m

492.4

1,966.4

 22.4

2,481.2

2014 
£m

134.0

15.3

9.7

159.0

2014 
£m

130.2

2014 
£m

(1.0)

(1.0)

2014 
£m

(346.7)

(741.6)

(0. 1)

(39.4)

(90.8)

(1,218.6)

(148.6)

(1,367.2)

All amounts included above are unsecured. The total of £39.4m (2014: £39.4m) for other taxes and social security includes £24.7m (2014: £29.5m) for 
Employer’s National Insurance provision in respect of share-based payments.

Further disclosures relating to current trade and non-current trade payables are set out in note 26.

05_BERKAR15_Notes_98-120.indd   112

14/07/2015   10:24

112

berkeley AnnuAl report 2015  /  finAnciAls 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
18 Provisions for other liabilities and charges

At 1 May 2014 

Reclassified from accruals 

Utilised 

Released 

Charged to the income statement 

At 30 April 2015 

At 1 May 2013 

Utilised 

Released 

Charged to the income statement 

At 30 April 2014 

Analysis of total provisions:

Non-current 

Current 

Total 

Total 
£m

(57. 1 )

(5.9)

4.5

24.5

(41. 1 )

(75. 1)

Total 
£m

(29.0)

2.5

1.2

(31.8)

(57. 1 )

2014 
£m

48.5

8.6

57. 1

2015 
£m 
61. 1  
14.0 
75. 1 

Provisions for other liabilities and charges primarily relate to provisions for a best estimate of certain post-completion development obligations in respect of 
the construction of its portfolio of complex mixed-use developments which are expected to be incurred in the ordinary course of business, based on historic 
experience, but which are uncertain in terms of timing and quantum. In addition, the Group holds provisions for litigation, for onerous leases on properties 
leased by the Group and for the Group’s exposure to specific estate liabilities on historic sites developed by the Group. These are not individually significant 
in terms of quantum.

19 Deferred tax
The movement on the deferred tax account is as follows:

At 1 May 2014 

Transfer to corporation tax receivable 

 (Charged)/credited to the income statement in year 

Credited to equity at 20% 

Realisation of deferred tax asset on vesting of employee share scheme 

Credited to equity in year (note 7) 

At 30 April 2015 

 Accelerated 
 capital 
 allowances 
 £m 

 Retirement 
 benefit 
 obligation 
 £m 

short-term 
timing 
differences 
£m 

0.3 

– 

0. 1  

– 

– 

– 

0.4 

 – 

– 

(0. 1) 

0. 1  

– 

0. 1  

– 

60.8 

0.7 

9.2 

13. 1  

(11.5) 

1.6 

72.3 

 Total 
 £m

61. 1

0.7

9.2

13.2

(11.5)

1.7

72.7

05_BERKAR15_Notes_98-120.indd   113

14/07/2015   10:24

113

berkeley AnnuAl report 2015  /  finAnciAlsStrategic reportgovernanceFinancialS 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements
continued

19 Deferred tax continued

At 1 May 2013 

Transfer to corporation tax receivable 

(Charged)/credited to the income statement at 23% (note 7) 

Adjustment in respect of change of tax rate from 23% to 21%/20% (note 7) 

(Charged)/credited to the income statement in year 

Credited to equity at 23% 

Adjustment in respect of change of tax rate from 23% to 21%/20% 

Realisation of deferred tax asset on vesting of employee share scheme 

Credited to equity in year (note 7) 

At 30 April 2014 

 Accelerated 
 capital 
 allowances 
 £m 

 Retirement 
 benefit 
 obligation 
 £m 

short-term 
timing 
differences 
£m 

0.3 

 – 

  – 

– 

–  

– 

– 

 – 

– 

 0.3 

– 

– 

(0. 1) 

– 

(0. 1) 

 0. 1  

 – 

 – 

 0. 1  

 – 

56.4 

(1. 1 ) 

16.6 

(5.3) 

11.3 

21.2 

(3.9) 

(23. 1) 

(5.8) 

60.8 

 Total 
 £m

56.7

(1. 1)

16.5

(5.3)

11.2

21.3

(3.9)

(23. 1)

(5.7)

61. 1

Deferred tax is calculated in full on temporary differences at the tax rates that are expected to apply for the period when the asset is realised and the 
liability is settled using a tax rate of 20% (2014: 21%/20%).  Accordingly, all temporary differences have been calculated.  There is no unprovided deferred tax 
(2014: nil) at the balance sheet date.

All deferred tax assets are available for offset against deferred tax liabilities and hence the net deferred tax asset at 30 April 2015 is £72.7m (2014: £61. 1m).

Deferred tax assets of £49.0m (2014: £58.3m) are expected to be recovered after more than one year.

The deferred tax credited to equity during the year was as follows:

Deferred tax on remeasurements of the net defined benefit asset/liability (note 7) 

Deferred tax in respect of employee share schemes (note 7) 

Movement in the year 

Cumulative deferred tax credited to equity at 1 May 

Cumulative deferred tax credited to equity at 30 April 

20 Share capital and share premium
The movements on allotted and fully paid share capital for the Company in the year were as follows:

2015  
£m  
0. 1  
1.6 
1.7 
27.0 
28.7 

2014 
 £m

 0. 1

(5.8)

 (5.7)

 32.7

 27.0

Issued 

At start of year 

Issued in year 

At end of year 

2015 
No ‘000 

  Ordinary shares 
2014 
 No ‘000 

135,357 
1,300 
136,657 

134,857 

500 

135,357 

2015 
£m 

6.8 
– 
6.8 

Share Capital 
2014 
£m 

  Share Premium 
2014 
£m

2015 
£m 

6.7 

0. 1  

6.8 

49.3 
0.3 
49.6 

49.3

–

49.3

Each ordinary share of 5p is a voting share in the capital of the Company, is entitled to participate in the profits of the Company and on a winding-up is 
entitled to participate in the assets of the Company.

On 31 March 2015, 1.3 million ordinary shares (2014: 0.5 million) were allotted and issued to the Employee Benefit Trust.

On 15 April 2015, 1.3 million ordinary shares (2014: 4.2 million) were transferred from the Employee Benefit Trust to Executive Directors and Senior 
Management to satisfy the exercise of options under the 2009 Long Term Incentive Plan Part B.

At 30 April 2015 there were 0. 1 million shares held in trust (2014: 0. 1 million). The market value of these shares at 30 April 2015 was £2.5m (2014: £2.4m).

05_BERKAR15_Notes_98-120.indd   114

14/07/2015   10:24

114

berkeley AnnuAl report 2015  /  finAnciAls 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
21 Reserves
The movement in reserves is set out in the Consolidated Statement of Changes in Equity on page 96.

Other reserve
The other reserve of negative £961.3m (2014: negative £961.3m) arose from the application of merger accounting principles to the financial statements on 
implementation of the capital reorganisation of the Group, incorporating a Scheme of Arrangement, in the year ended 30 April 2005.

Revaluation reserve
The revaluation reserve consists of balances in relation to two separate transactions. 

The first element arose following the acquisition on 7 November 2006 of the 50% of the ordinary share capital of St James Group Limited not already 
owned. 

A revaluation reserve of £20.3m was originally created in accordance with IFRS 3 through fair value adjustments to the 50% of the net assets of St James 
Group Limited owned by the Group prior to 7 November 2006. Transfers of £3.9m in the year (2014: £nil) out of retained earnings was recognised as the 
associated fair value adjustments. At 30 April 2015 the balance in the revaluation reserve relating to the acquisition of St James Group Limited is £nil (2014: 
£3.9m).

The second element arose in 2010 following the acquisition on 23 July 2009 of the shares owned by Saad Investments Company Limited and the 
outstanding shareholder loans in five joint ventures which became fully owned subsidiaries from this date. A revaluation reserve of £0.6m was created in 
accordance with IFRS 3 through fair value adjustments to the 50% of the net assets of the joint ventures owned by the Group prior to 23 July 2009. 
Transfers of £0.2m in the year (2014: £nil) out of retained earnings were recognised as the associated fair value adjustments. At 30 April 2015 the balance in 
the revaluation reserve relating to the acquisition of the five entities that were previously joint ventures with Saad Investments Company Limited is £nil 
(2014: £0.2m).

Capital redemption reserve
The capital redemption reserve was created to maintain the capital of the Company following the redemption of the B Shares associated with the Scheme 
of Arrangement created in 2004 which completed on 10 September 2009 with the re-designation of the unissued B shares as ordinary shares.

Retained earnings
The Company and the Company’s Employee Benefit Trust acquired none (2014: none) of its own shares through purchases on the London Stock Exchange 
in the year.

22 Dividends per share
The dividends paid in 2015 were a total of £243.5 million, £121.75 million in January 2015 (90 pence per share) and £121.75 million in September 2014 (90 
pence per share) (2014: £195.2 million being £77.2 million in September 2013, 59 pence per share, and £118.0 million in January 2014, 90 pence per share). 
A further interim dividend of £123.0 million (90 pence per share) has been declared for payment on 17 September 2015. These financial statements do not 
reflect this further interim dividend. 

23 Contingent liabilities
Certain companies within the Group have given performance and other trade guarantees on behalf of other members of the Group in the ordinary course 
of business. The Group has performance agreements in the ordinary course of business of £19.5m which are guaranteed by third parties (2014: £15.0m). The 
Group considers that the likelihood of an outflow of cash under these agreements is low and that no provision is required.

24 Operating leases – minimum lease payments
The total future aggregate minimum lease payments of the Group under non-cancellable operating leases are set out below:

Amounts due within:

Within one year 

Between one and five years 

After five years 

2015 
£m 

1.6 
2.8 
1.7 
6. 1  

2014 
£m

1.9

4.4

2.4

8.7

05_BERKAR15_Notes_98-120.indd   115

14/07/2015   10:24

115

berkeley AnnuAl report 2015  /  finAnciAlsStrategic reportgovernanceFinancialS 
 
 
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements
continued

25 Notes to the consolidated cash flow statement
Reconciliation of profit after taxation for the year to cash generated from operations:

Profit after taxation for the year 

Adjustments for:

– Taxation 

– Depreciation 

– Loss on sale of fixed assets 

– Profit on sale of investment properties 

– Finance income 

– Finance costs 

– Share of results of joint ventures after tax 

– Non-cash charge in respect of share-based payments 

Changes in working capital:

– Increase in inventories 

– Decrease/(increase) in trade and other receivables 

– Increase in trade and other payables 

– Decrease in employee benefit obligations 

Cash generated from operations 

Reconciliation of net cash flow to net cash:

Net increase in cash and cash equivalents, including bank overdraft 

Net cash outflow from decrease in borrowings 

Movement in net cash/(debt) in the year 

Opening net cash 

Closing net cash 

Net cash:

As at 30 April 

Cash and cash equivalents 

Current borrowings  

Net cash 

2015 
£m 
423.5 

116.2 
2.7 
0.2 
(1.3) 
(3.0) 
15.7 
(28.3) 
2.7 

(172.9) 
7.6 
281. 1  
(0.6) 
643.6 

2015 
£m 
300.7 
1.0 
301.7 
129.2 
430.9 

2015 
£m 
430.9 
– 
430.9 

2014 
£m

292.9

87. 1

2.0

0.7

(43.2)

(3.4)

10.3

(12. 1)

3.3

(414.5)

(33.6)

370.8

(0.6)

259.7

2014 
£m

63.4

21. 1

84.5

44.7

129.2

2014 
£m

130.2

(1.0)

129.2

26 Capital management, financial instruments and financial risk management
The Group finances its operations by a combination of shareholders’ funds, working capital and, where appropriate, borrowings. The Group’s objective when 
managing capital is to maintain an appropriate capital structure in the business to allow management to focus on creating sustainable long-term value for 
its shareholders, with flexibility to take advantage of opportunities as they arise in the short and medium term. This allows the Group to take advantage of 
prevailing market conditions by investing in land and work in progress at the right point in the cycle or delivering returns to shareholders through dividends 
or share buy backs. In 2012 the Group put in place a long-term strategic plan to see £13 per share returned to shareholders over the following 10 years. This 
plan, reported in more detail in the Trading and Financial Review on pages 50 to 54, ensures there is sufficient working capital retained in the business to 
continue investing selectively in new land opportunities as they arise.

The Group monitors capital levels principally by monitoring net cash/debt levels, cash flow forecasts and return on average capital employed. The Group 
considers capital employed to be net assets adjusted for net cash/debt. Capital employed at 30 April 2015 was £1,207.0m (2014: £1,312. 1m). The decrease in 
capital employed in the year of £105. 1m reflects an increase in net cash holdings during the year.

The Group’s financial instruments comprise financial assets being: trade receivables and cash and cash equivalents and financial liabilities being: bank loans, 
trade payables, deposits and on account receipts, loans from joint ventures and accruals. Cash and cash equivalents and borrowings are the principal 
financial instruments used to finance the business. The other financial instruments highlighted arise in the ordinary course of business.

As all of the operations carried out by the Group are in sterling there is no direct currency risk, and therefore the Group’s main financial risks are primarily:

– liquidity risk – the risk that suitable funding for the Group’s activities may not be available;

– market interest rate risk – the risk that Group financing activities are adversely affected by fluctuation in market interest rates; and

– credit risk – the risk that a counterparty will default on their contractual obligations resulting in a loss to the Group.

116

05_BERKAR15_Notes_98-120.indd   116

14/07/2015   10:24

berkeley AnnuAl report 2015  /  finAnciAls 
 
 
 
 
 
Financial instruments: Financial assets
The Group’s financial assets can be summarised as follows:

Current

Trade receivables 

Cash and cash equivalents 

Non-current

Available-for-sale financial assets 

Total financial assets 

2015 
£m 

123.9 
430.9 
554.8 

12.0 
12.0 
566.8 

2014 
£m

134.0

130.2

264.2

11.0

11.0

275.2

Trade receivables and available-for-sale financial assets are non-interest bearing. Of the current trade receivables balance of £123.9m (30 April 2014: 
£134.0m), £119.1m (30 April 2014: £127.3m) was not past due, with £4.8m being 0–30 days past due (30 April 2014: £6.7m, 0–30 days past due). 

Cash and cash equivalents are short-term deposits held at either floating rates linked to LIBOR or fixed rates.

The table below analyses financial instruments carried at fair value, by valuation method. The different levels have been defined as follows:

– Quoted prices (unadjusted) in active markets for identical assets or liabilities (level 1).

– Inputs other than quoted prices included within level 1 that are observable for the asset or liability, either directly (that is, as prices) or indirectly (that is, 
derived from prices) (level 2).

– Inputs for the asset or liability that are not based on observable market data (that is, unobservable inputs) (level 3).

The following table presents the group’s assets that are measured at fair value:

2015 
Assets

Available-for-sale financial assets 

Total assets 

2014 

Assets

Available-for-sale financial assets 

Total assets 

Financial instruments: Financial liabilities
The Group’s financial liabilities can be summarised as follows:

Current

Bank loans 

Trade payables 

Loans from joint ventures 

Accruals and deferred income 

Non-current

Trade payables 

Total financial liabilities 

Notes 

12 

Notes 

12 

Level 1 
£m 

Level 2 
£m 

Level 3 
£m 

– 

– 

12.0 

12.0 

– 

– 

Level 1 
£m 

Level 2 
£m 

Level 3 
£m 

– 

– 

11.0 

11.0 

– 

– 

2015  
£m  

– 

(391.9) 
(0. 1) 
(151.5) 
(543.5) 

(131.7) 
(131.7) 
(675.2) 

Total 
£m

12.0

12.0

Total 
£m

11.0

11.0

2014 
 £m

(1.0)

(346.7)

(0. 1)

(90.8)

(438.6)

(148.6)

(148.6)

(587.2)

All amounts included above are unsecured.

Current bank loans have term expiry dates within twelve months of the balance sheet date and are held at floating interest rates linked to LIBOR. Trade 
payables and other current liabilities are non-interest bearing. 

05_BERKAR15_Notes_98-120.indd   117

14/07/2015   10:24

117

berkeley AnnuAl report 2015  /  finAnciAlsStrategic reportgovernanceFinancialS 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements
continued

26 Capital management, financial instruments and financial risk management continued
The maturity profile of the Group’s non-current financial liabilities, all of which are held at amortised cost, is as follows:

In more than one year but not more than two years 

In more than two years but not more than five years 

In more than five years 

2015  
£m  
(67.4) 
(32.3) 
(32.0) 
(131.7) 

2014 
 £m

(54.3)

(93.3)

(1.0)

(148.6)

The carrying amounts of the Group’s financial assets and financial liabilities approximate to fair value. 

Current trade receivables and current trade and other payables approximate to their fair value as the transactions which give rise to these balances arise in 
the normal course of trade and, where relevant, with industry standard payment terms and have a short period to maturity (less than one year). 

Current trade receivables include £14.4m relating to amounts owed by St Edward Homes Limited in respect of the inventory sold by the Group in 2009 
(Note 27). This is held at its discounted present value (calculated by discounting expected future cash flows at prevailing interest rates and yields as 
appropriate). The discount rate applied reflects the nominal, risk-free pre-tax rate at the balance sheet date, applied to the maturity profile. At 30 April 2015 
a rate of 0.85% was applied (2014: 1.08%).

Non-current trade payables comprise long-term land payables, which are held at their discounted present value (calculated by discounting expected future 
cash flows at prevailing interest rates and yields as appropriate). The discount rate applied reflects the nominal, risk-free pre-tax rate at the balance sheet 
date, applied to the maturity profile of the individual land creditors within the total. At 30 April 2015 a rate of 0.85% was applied (2014: 1.08%). Non-current 
loans approximate to fair value as they are held at variable market interest rates linked to LIBOR.

Liquidity risk
This is the risk that suitable funding for the Group’s activities may not be available. Group management addresses this risk through review of rolling cash 
flow forecasts throughout the year to assess and monitor the current and forecast availability of funding, and to ensure sufficient headroom against facility 
limits and compliance with banking covenants. The committed borrowing facilities are set out below.

The contractual undiscounted maturity profile of the Group’s financial liabilities, included at their carrying value in the preceding tables, is as follows:

In less than one year 

In more than one year but not more than two years 

In more than two years but not more than five years 

In more than five years 

2015  
£m  
(543.5) 
(68.0) 
(33.0) 
(35.0) 
(679.5) 

2014 
 £m

(441.5)

(55.0)

(96.0)

(1.0)

(593.5)

Market interest rate risk
The Group’s cash and cash equivalents and bank loans expose the Group to cash flow interest rate risk.

The Group’s rolling cash flow forecasts incorporate appropriate interest assumptions, and management carefully assesses expected activity levels and 
associated funding requirements in the prevailing and forecast interest rate environment to ensure that this risk is managed. 

If interest rates on the Group’s cash/debt balances had been 50 basis points higher throughout the year ended 30 April 2015, profit after tax for the year 
would have been £1,014,000 higher (2014: £483,000 higher). This calculation is based on the monthly closing net cash/debt balance throughout the year. A 
50 basis point increase in interest rate represents management’s assessment of a reasonably possible change for the year ended 30 April 2015. 

Credit risk
The Group’s exposure to credit risk encompasses the financial assets being: trade receivables and cash and cash equivalents.

Trade receivables are spread across a wide number of customers, with no significant concentration of credit risk in one area. There has been no impairment 
of trade receivables during the year (2014: £nil), nor are there any provisions held against trade receivables (2014: £nil), and no trade receivables are past 
their due date (2014: £nil).

The credit risk on cash and cash equivalents is limited because counterparties are leading international banks with long-term A credit-ratings assigned by 
international credit agencies.

05_BERKAR15_Notes_98-120.indd   118

14/07/2015   10:24

118

berkeley AnnuAl report 2015  /  finAnciAls 
 
 
 
 
 
Committed borrowing facilities
The Group has committed borrowing facilities as follows:

Revolving credit facility one 

Revolving credit facility two 

New Revolving credit facility 

Available 
£m 

Drawn 
£m 

– 

– 

575 

575 

– 

– 

– 

– 

 £m 

2015 
Undrawn  Termination 
date 
– 
– 
Mar-20 

– 

– 

575 
575 

Available 
£m 

Drawn 
£m 

Undrawn 
£m 

275 

250 

– 

525 

– 

– 

– 

– 

275 

250 

– 

525 

2014 
Termination 
date 

May-18

Apr-18

–

As of 23 March 2015, the two revolving credit facilities (RCF 1 and RCF 2)  merged into one new revolving facility with the total facility increasing to £575 
million (2014: £525 million).  The term of the facility is 5 years with a maturity date of 23 March 2020.

At 30 April 2015 the total drawn down balance of the facility was £nil (2014: £nil). In addition, at 30 April 2015 there were bank bonds in issue of £5.0m 
(2014: £0.2m).

The revolving credit facility is secured by debentures provided by certain Group holding companies over their assets. The facility agreement contains 
financial covenants, which is normal for such agreements, with all of which the Group is in compliance. 

27 Related party transactions
The Group has entered into the following related party transactions:

Transactions with directors
In terms of new transactions in the 2015 financial year:

i)   During the financial year, Mr A W Pidgley paid £25,470 (2014: £440,052) to Berkeley Homes plc for works carried out at his home under the Group’s 
own build scheme. This is a scheme whereby eligible employees may enter into an arrangement, at commercial rates, with the Group for the construction or 
renovation of their own home. There were no balances outstanding at the year end.

ii)  Berkeley Homes plc has entered into an agreement with Langham Homes, a company controlled by Mr T K Pidgley who is the son of the Group’s 
Chairman, under which Langham Homes will be paid a fee for a land introduction on an arm’s length basis. A fee of £173,000 was paid under this 
agreement in the period and there were no outstanding balances at 30 April 2015 when the land purchase became unconditional.  Langham Homes 
continues to introduce land to the Group and in the event that any further land purchases are agreed, further fees may be payable to Langham Homes in 
future periods. In prior years, £1,274,000 has been paid to Langham Homes in respect of two sites acquired by the Group, also on an arm’s length basis.

iii)  Mr G J Fry, a Director of the Company, contracted to purchase an apartment at Brewery Wharf, London and a car parking space for £565,000 on 21 
August 2014 from St James Group Limited, a wholly owned subsidiary of the Company.

Ms D Brightmore-Armour, on 14 April 2014 prior to becoming a Director of the Company, contracted to purchase an apartment at 190 Strand, London for 
£2,985,000 from St Edward Homes Limited, a joint venture of the Company, for which shareholder approval was not required. Subsequent to this purchase, 
and having been appointed a Director of the Company, Ms Brightmore-Armour received Board approval to purchase a storage room at the property for 
£101,200.

The agreements between St James Group Limited and Mr Fry and St Edward Homes Limited and Ms Brightmore-Armour are standard form sale and 
purchase agreements used by the Company on its developments, save that Mr Fry’s purchase of his apartment and Ms Brightmore-Armour’s purchase of 
the storage room are conditional upon the agreement of shareholders.

As these transactions are in excess of £100,000, they constitute a substantial property transaction with a Director of the Company under sections 190 and 
191 of the Companies Act 2006 and are therefore conditional on the approval of shareholders, which will be sought at the Annual General Meeting in 
September 2015.

Mr Fry paid a ten per cent deposit on exchange of contracts which will only be returned to him in the event that shareholders do not approve the 
transaction. Ms Brightmore-Armour has already paid a 10% deposit on exchange of contracts for the apartment and no further deposit is payable on 
purchase of the storage room, with payment due on completion.

In terms of transactions previously disclosed, all of which received shareholder approval, the purchases of an apartment by Mr G Fry at at Sovereign Court 
for £819,950 in 2014 and by Mr R C Perrins at 190 Strand for £2,100,000 in 2013. At 30 April 2015, any contractual deposit due to date had been paid to the 
Group, there were no current balances outstanding and the properties were still under construction and so the sales had not yet completed. The purchase 
of an apartment by Mr A W Pidgley at Ebury Square in 2013 for £10,500,000 completed and the balance of monies were fully settled in the year, along with 
a further £1,330,000 for enhancements to specification. The purchase of an apartment by Mr G Fry at Chelsea Creek in 2012 for £725,000 completed and 
the balance was fully settled in the year.

Transactions with joint ventures
During the financial year there were no transactions with joint ventures other than movements in loans. In 2009 inventory was sold to St Edward Homes 
Limited for £17,411,000 being the share of the transaction attributable to the other venturer in the joint venture. At 30 April 2015 an amount of £14,449,000 
was outstanding and included within trade receivables (2014: £16,219,000).

05_BERKAR15_Notes_98-120.indd   119

14/07/2015   10:24

119

berkeley AnnuAl report 2015  /  finAnciAlsStrategic reportgovernanceFinancialS 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements
continued

28 Subsidiaries and joint ventures
(a) Subsidiaries
At 30 April 2015 the Company had the following principal subsidiary undertakings which have all been consolidated, are registered and operate in England 
and Wales, are all 100% owned and for which 100% of voting rights are held except where stated:

Residential led mixed-use development and ancillary activities

Berkeley Commercial Developments Limited 

Berkeley Homes (Western) Limited (1) 

Berkeley Homes (Capital) plc (1) 

Berkeley Homes (Carmelite) Limited 

Berkeley Homes (Central London) Limited (1) 

Berkeley Homes (East Thames) Limited (1) 

Berkeley Homes (Eastern Counties) Limited (1) 

Berkeley Homes (Eastern) Limited (1) 

Berkeley Homes (Fleet) Limited 

Berkeley Homes (Hampshire) Limited (1) 

Berkeley Homes (North East London) Limited (1) 

Berkeley Homes (Oxford & Chiltern) Limited (1) 

Berkeley Homes (PCL) Limited 

Berkeley Homes (South East London) Limited (1) 

Berkeley Homes (Southern) Limited (1) 

Berkeley Homes (Three Valleys) Limited (1) 

Berkeley Homes (West London) Limited (1) 

Berkeley Partnership Homes Limited (1) 

Berkeley Homes Public Limited Company

Berkeley Ryewood Limited 

Berkeley Strategic Land Limited 

BH (City Forum) Limited 

St George Battersea Reach Limited (Jersey)

St George Blackfriars Limited 

St George Central London Limited (2)

St George North London Limited (2)

St George PLC 

St George South London Limited (2) 

St George West London Limited (2) 

St George City Limited (2)

St James (Grosvenor Dock) Limited

St James Group Limited 

 St James Homes Limited

St James (West London) Limited 

The Berkeley Group plc (3)

The Tower, One St George Wharf Limited  

(1) Agency companies of Berkeley Homes plc
(2) Agency companies of St George PLC
(3) The Berkeley Group plc is the only direct subsidiary of the Parent Company and is an intermediate holding company

Other activities

BRP Investments No.1 Limited (Jersey)

BRP Investments No.2 Limited (Jersey)

 (b) Joint Ventures
At 30 April 2015 the Group had an interest in the following principal joint ventures which have been equity accounted to 30 April, have an accounting date 
of 30 April otherwise indicated and are registered and operate in England and Wales and which are 50% owned:

St Edward Homes Limited 

St Edward Homes Partnership 

The St Edward (Strand) Partnership  

St William Homes LLP* 

* Accounting date of 31 March

Principal activity 

Residential-led mixed-use development

Residential-led mixed-use development

Residential-led mixed-use development

Residential-led mixed-use development

05_BERKAR15_Notes_98-120.indd   120

14/07/2015   10:24

120

berkeley AnnuAl report 2015  /  finAnciAls 
Company Balance Sheet

As at 30 April 

Fixed assets

Investments 

Current assets

Debtors 

Cash at bank and in hand 

Current liabilities

Creditors (amounts falling due within one year) 

Net current liabilities 

Total assets less current liabilities and net assets 

Capital and reserves

Called-up share capital 

Share premium account 

Capital redemption reserve 

Profit and loss account 

Total shareholders’ funds 

Notes 

C5 

C6 

C7 

C8 

C9 

C9 

C9 

C10 

2015 
£m 

1,400.6 

1,400.6 

6.5 

0.9 

7.4 

(618.2) 

(610.8) 

789.8 

6.8 

49.6 

24.5 

708.9 

789.8 

2014 
£m

 1,397.0

 1,397.0

 6.0

 0.9

 6.9

(622.9)

(616.0)

 781.0

 6.8

 49.3

 24.5

 700.4

 781.0

The financial statements on pages 121 to 125 were approved by the board of directors on 30 June 2015 and were signed on its behalf by:

R J Stearn
Finance director

06_BERK_AR15_NotesToCompBalSht_121-127.indd   121

14/07/2015   10:26

121

berkeley AnnuAl report 2015  /  finAnciAlsStrategic reportgovernanceFinancialS 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Company Financial Statements

C1 Accounting policies
Basis of preparation
These financial statements have been prepared under the historical cost convention and in accordance with the Companies Act 2006, where applicable, 
and applicable accounting standards in the United Kingdom (United Kingdom Generally Accepted Accounting Practice) and on the going concern basis. 
The principal accounting policies are set out below and have been applied consistently throughout the year.

The principal activity of The Berkeley Group Holdings plc (“the Company”) is to act as a holding company.

The Company has not presented its own profit and loss account as permitted by Section 408 of the Companies Act 2006.

The Company has not presented its own statement of total recognised gains and losses for the year as there are no separate gains or losses arising in the 
year.

Going concern
The Group’s business activities together with the factors likely to affect its future development performance and position are set out in the Business Review. 
The financial position of the Group, its cash flows, liquidity position and borrowing facilities are all described in the Trading and Financial Reviews on pages 
50 to 54. 

The Group has significant financial resources and the Directors have assessed the future funding requirements of the Group, including the repayment of 
£1.7 billion to shareholders by 2021, and compared this to the level of committed loan facilities and cash resources over the medium term. In making this 
assessment consideration has been given to the uncertainty inherent in future financial forecasts and where applicable reasonable sensitivities have been 
applied to the key factors affecting the financial performance of the Group. 

Based on the financial performance of the Group, the Directors have a reasonable expectation that the Company has adequate resources to continue its 
operational existence for the foreseeable future, notwithstanding its net current liability position of £610.8m (30 April 2014: £616.0m). For this reason they 
continue to adopt the going concern basis of accounting in preparing the annual financial statements. 

Expenditure
Expenditure is recognised in respect of goods and services received when supplied in accordance with contractual terms. Provision is made when an 
obligation exists for a future liability in respect of a past event and where the amount of the obligation can be reliably estimated.

Pensions
Pension contributions under defined contribution schemes are charged to the income statement as they fall due.

Investments
Investments in subsidiary undertakings are included in the balance sheet at cost less provision for any impairment.

Deferred taxation
Deferred tax is recognised in respect of all timing differences that have originated but not reversed at the balance sheet date, where transactions or events 
that result in an obligation to pay more tax in the future or a right to pay less tax in the future have occurred at the balance sheet date.

A net deferred tax asset is recognised as recoverable and therefore recognised only when, on the basis of all available evidence, it can be regarded as more 
likely than not that there will be suitable taxable profits against which to recover carried forward tax losses and from which the future reversal of underlying 
timing differences can be deducted.

Deferred tax is measured at the average tax rates that are expected to apply in the periods in which the timing differences are expected to reverse, based 
on tax rates and laws that have been enacted or substantively enacted by the balance sheet date. Deferred tax is measured on an undiscounted basis.

Share-based payments
The Company operates three equity-settled, share-based compensation plans. The fair value of the employee services received in exchange for the grant of 
the options is recognised as an expense. The total amount to be expensed over the vesting period is determined by reference to the fair value of the 
options granted. 

At each balance sheet date, the Company revises its estimates of the number of options that are expected to vest. It recognises the impact of the revision 
to original estimates, if any, in the profit and loss account, with a corresponding adjustment to equity.

The proceeds received net of any directly attributable transaction costs are credited to share capital (nominal value) and share premium when the options 
are exercised.

Dividends
Dividend distributions to shareholders are recognised as a liability in the period in which the dividends are appropriately authorised and approved for 
payout and are no longer at the discretion of the Company. Unpaid dividends that do not meet these criteria are disclosed in the notes to the financial 
statements.

C2 Profit/(loss) on ordinary activities before taxation
Profit/(loss) on ordinary activities before taxation is stated after charging the following amounts:

Auditors’ remuneration – audit fees 

No disclosure of other non-audit services has been made as this is included within note 5 of the consolidated financial statements.

2015 
£m 
0.1  

2014 
 £m 

0.1

06_BERK_AR15_NotesToCompBalSht_121-127.indd   122

14/07/2015   10:26

122

berkeley AnnuAl report 2015  /  finAnciAls 
 
C3 Directors and employees

Staff costs 

Wages and salaries 

Social security costs 

Share-based payments 

2015 
£m 

12.9 
7.6 
19.2 
39.7 

2014 
 £m 

15.0

10.0

1.4

26.4

The average monthly number of persons employed by the company during the year was 10, all of whom are Directors (2014: 9).

Directors
Details of Directors’ emoluments are set out in the Remuneration Report on pages 66 to 83.

Pensions
During the year, the Company participated in one of the Group’s pension schemes, The Berkeley Group plc Group Personal Pension Plan. Further details on 
this scheme are set out in note 6 of the Consolidated Financial Statements. Contributions amounting to £49,650 (2014: £48,150) were paid into the defined 
contribution scheme during the year.

Share-based payments
The charge to the income statement in respect of share-based payments in the year, relating to grants of shares; share options and notional shares awarded 
under the 2009 Long-Term Incentive Plan and the 2011 Long-Term Incentive Plan was £19.2m (2014: £1.4m). Further information on the Company’s share 
incentive schemes are included in the Remuneration Report on pages 66 to 83 as well as note 6 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

C4 The Berkeley Group Holdings plc profit and loss account
The profit for the year in the Company is £249.3m (2014: profit of £248.9m).

C5 Investments

Investments in shares of subsidiary undertaking at cost at 1 May 

Additions 

Investment in shares of subsidiary undertaking at cost at 30 April 

2015 
£m 
1,397.0 
3.6 
1,400.6 

2014 
 £m 

1,395. 1

1.9

 1,397.0

Additions in the year relate to company contributions to The Berkeley Group plc for employee services to be settled through the issue of shares on the 
vesting of the Berkeley Group Holdings plc 2009 Part (b) and 2011 Long Term Incentive Plan awards for the benefit of executive directors of its subsidiaries.

The directors believe that the carrying value of the investments is supported by their underlying net assets.

Details of principal subsidiaries are given within note 29 of the Consolidated Financial Statements.

C6 Debtors

Current 

Deferred tax 

The movements on the deferred tax asset are as follows:

At 1 May 

Deferred tax in respect of employee share schemes credited to reserves 

Realisation of deferred tax asset on vesting of employee share scheme 

At 30 April 

2015 
£m 

6.5 

2015 
£m 
6.0 
1.8 
(1.3) 
6.5 

2014 
 £m 

6.0

2014 
 £m 

8.3

1. 1

(3.4)

6.0

Deferred tax is calculated in full on temporary differences at the tax rates that are expected to apply for the period when the asset is realised and the 
liability is settled using a tax rate of 20% (2014: 21%/20%). Accordingly, all temporary differences have been calculated. There is no unprovided deferred tax 
(2014: nil) at the balance sheet date.

The deferred tax asset of £6.5m relates to short-term timing differences (2014: £6.0m).

06_BERK_AR15_NotesToCompBalSht_121-127.indd   123

14/07/2015   10:26

123

berkeley AnnuAl report 2015  /  finAnciAlsStrategic reportgovernanceFinancialS 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Company Financial Statements
continued

C7 Creditors: Amounts falling due within one year

Amounts owed to subsidiary undertakings 

Other taxation and social security 

2015 
£m 
(610. 1) 
(8. 1) 
(618.2) 

2014 
 £m 

(612.7)

(10.2)

(622.9)

All amounts included above are unsecured. The interest rate on £624.9m (2014: £601m) of the balance owed to subsidiary undertakings is 4.0% (2014: 
4.0%). 

At 30 April 2015 all other amounts owed to subsidiary undertakings are at floating rates linked to LIBOR and have no fixed repayment date.

C8 Called-up share capital
Each ordinary share of 5p is a voting share in the capital of the Company, is entitled to participate in the profits of the Company and on a winding-up is 
entitled to participate in the assets of the Company.

The movements on allotted and fully paid share capital for the Company in the year were as follows:

Issued

At start of year 

Issued in year 

At end of year 

2015 
No ‘000 

   Ordinary shares 
2014 
No ‘000 

2015 
£m 

 Share Capital 
2014 
£m 

   Share Premium 
2014 
£m

2015 
£m 

135,357 
1,300 
136,657 

134,857 

500 

135,357 

6.8 
– 
6.8 

6.7 

 0. 1  

6.8 

49.3 
0.3 
49.6 

49.3

–

49.3

Each ordinary share of 5p is a voting share in the capital of the Company, is entitled to participate in the profits of the Company and on a winding-up is 
entitled to participate in the assets of the Company.

On 31 March 2015, 1.3 million ordinary shares (2014: 0.5 million) were allotted and issued to the Employee Benefit Trust.

On 15 April 2015, 1.3 million ordinary shares (2014: 4.2 million) were transferred from the Employee Benefit Trust to Executive Directors to satisfy the exercise 
of options under the 2009 Long Term Incentive Plan Part B.

At 30 April 2015 there were 0.1m shares held in trust (2014: 0.1m). The market value of these shares at 30 April 2015 was £2.5m (2014: £2.4m).

The movements in the year are disclosed in note 20 of the Consolidated Financial Statements.

C9 Reserves

At 1 May 2014 

Issued in year 

Profit for the financial year 

Dividends paid 

Credit in respect of employee share schemes 

At 30 April 2015 

Share 
 premium account 
£m 

49.3 

0.3 

– 

–  

– 

Capital  
redemption 
reserve 
£m 

24.5 

– 

– 

– 

– 

49.6 

24.5 

Profit and 
loss account 
£m 

700.4 

– 

249.3 

(243.5) 

2.7 

708.9 

Total 
£m 

774.2

0.3

249.3

(243.5)

2.7

783.0

06_BERK_AR15_NotesToCompBalSht_121-127.indd   124

14/07/2015   10:26

124

berkeley AnnuAl report 2015  /  finAnciAls 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
C10 Reconciliation of movements in shareholders’ funds

Profit for the financial year 

Dividends paid 

Equity settlement of employee share schemes 

Credit in respect of employee share scheme 

Opening equity shareholders’ funds 

Closing equity shareholders’ funds 

2015 
£m 
249.3 
(243.5) 
0.3 
2.7 
8.8 
781.0 
789.8 

2014 
 £m 

248.9

(195.2)

0. 1

3.3

57. 1

723.9

781.0

C11 Dividends per share
The dividends paid in 2015 were a total of £243.5 million, £121.75 million in January 2015 (90 pence per share) and £121.75 million in September 2014 (90 
pence per share) (2014: £195.2 million being £77.2 million in September 2014, 59 pence per share, and £118.0 million in January 2015, 90 pence per share). 
A further interim dividend of £123.0 million (90 pence per share) has been declared for payment on 17 September 2015. These financial statements do not 
reflect this further interim dividend. 

C12 Related party transactions
The Company is exempt under the terms of Financial Reporting Standard 8 “Related party disclosures” from disclosing related party transactions with 
entities that are part of The Berkeley Group Holdings plc or investees of The Berkeley Group Holdings plc. 

06_BERK_AR15_NotesToCompBalSht_121-127.indd   125

14/07/2015   10:26

125

berkeley AnnuAl report 2015  /  finAnciAlsStrategic reportgovernanceFinancialS 
 
 
Five year summary

Years ended 30 April 

Income statement

Revenue from operations 

Operating profit 

Share of results of joint ventures 

Net finance (costs)/income 

Profit before taxation 

Taxation 

Profit after taxation 

Profit attributable to:

Shareholders 

Non-controlling interest 

Basic earnings per ordinary share 

Statement of financial position

Capital employed 

Net cash/(debt) 

Net assets 

Non-controlling interest 

Shareholders’ funds 

Net assets per share attributable to shareholders (1) 

Ratios and statistics

Return on capital employed (2) 

Return on equity after tax (3) 

Return on equity before tax (4) 

Units sold (5) 

2015 
£m 

2014 
£m 

2012 
£m 

2011 
£m 

2010 
£m 

2,020.2 

1,620.6 

1,372.6 

1,041. 1  

742.6

524. 1  

28.3 

(12.7) 

539.7 

(116.2) 

423.5 

423.5 

– 

423.5 

313.0p 

1,207.0 

430.9 

1,637.9 

– 

1,637.9 

1,199p 

34.8% 

25.2% 

29.5% 

3,355 

374.8 

12. 1  

(6.9) 

380.0 

(87. 1 ) 

292.9 

292.9 

– 

292.9 

221.8p 

1,312. 1  

129.2 

1,441.3 

– 

1,441.3 

1,066p 

29.9% 

21.2% 

27.5% 

3,742 

280. 1  

(1.3) 

(8. 1 ) 

270.7 

(61.0) 

209.7 

209.7 

– 

209.7 

160.0p 

1,277.7 

44.7 

1,322.4 

– 

1,322.4 

1,009p 

22.9% 

17.3% 

22.4% 

3,712 

226.4 

(2.2) 

(9.4) 

214.8 

(56.7) 

158. 1  

158.5 

(0.4) 

158. 1  

121.0p 

1,157.7 

(57.9) 

1,099.8 

– 

1,099.8 

839p 

21.9% 

15.6% 

21.2% 

3,565 

135.7

2. 1

(1.5)

136.3

(41.8)

94.5

95. 1

(0.6)

94.5

72. 1 p

891.8

42.0

933.8

(4.4)

929.4

709p

19.2%

 10.6%

15.3%

2,544

(1) Net assets attributable to shareholders divided by the number of shares in issue excluding shares held in treasury and shares held by the employee 
benefit trust.

(2) Calculated as adjusted* profit before interest and taxation (including joint venture (loss)/profit before tax) divided by the average net assets adjusted for 
(debt)/cash.

(3) Calculated as adjusted* profit after taxation attributable to shareholders as a percentage of the average of opening and closing shareholders’ funds.

(4) Calculated as adjusted* profit before taxation attributable to shareholders as a percentage of the average of opening and closing shareholders’ funds.

(5) The number of units completed and taken to sales in the year excluding joint ventures.

 * Adjusted figures exclude the benefit of profit on the sale of ground rent assets.

06_BERK_AR15_NotesToCompBalSht_121-127.indd   126

14/07/2015   10:26

126

berkeley AnnuAl report 2015  /  finAnciAls 
 
BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2015  /  FINANCIALS

Financial Diary

Annual General Meeting and Interim Management Statement 

Half Year End 

Interim Results Announcement for the six months ending 31 October 2015 

Interim Management Statement 

Year End 

Preliminary Announcement of Results for the year ending 30 April 2016 

Publication of 2016 Annual Report 

8 September 2015

31 October 2015

4 December 2015

March 2016

30 April 2016

June 2016

 August 2016

Registered Office and Advisors

Registered office and  
principal place of business 
Berkeley House 
19 Portsmouth Road 
Cobham 
Surrey KT11 1JG

Registered number: 5172586

Registrars 
Capita Registrars 
The Registry 
34 Beckenham Road 
Beckenham 
Kent BR3 4TU

0871 664 0300 (from the UK)  
+44 20 8639 3399 (from overseas)

Corporate broker and  
financial advisor 
UBS Investment Bank

Share price information 
The Company’s share capital is  
listed on the London Stock Exchange.  
The latest share price is available  
via the Company’s website at  
www.berkeleygroup.co.uk

Solicitors 
Herbert Smith Freehills LLP 

Bankers 
Barclays Bank plc 
HSBC Bank plc  
Lloyds TSB Bank plc 
Santander UK plc 
Svenska Handelsbanken AB (Publ) 
The Royal Bank of Scotland plc

Auditors 
KPMG LLP

127

STRATEGIC REPORTGOVERNANCEFINANCIALSThe Berkeley Group Holdings plc
Berkeley House
19 Portsmouth Road
Cobham
Surrey KT11 1JG
UK

T  +44 (0)1932 868 555
F  +44 (0)1932 868 667
www.berkeleygroup.co.uk

Design by Hunter Design

Printed in England by Pureprint Group
This report is printed on Amadeus 100 silk 
and Amadeus 100 offset

128

BERKELEY ANNUAL REPORT 2015  /  STRATEGIC REPORT